HSPICE® Command

Reference
Release U-2003.09-RA, September 2003

Comments?
E-mail your comments about Synopsys
documentation to [email protected]
Copyright Notice and Proprietary Information
Copyright  2003 Synopsys, Inc. All rights reserved. This software and documentation contain confidential and proprietary
information that is the property of Synopsys, Inc. The software and documentation are furnished under a license agreement and
may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the license agreement. No part of the software and documentation may
be reproduced, transmitted, or translated, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, manual, optical, or otherwise,
without prior written permission of Synopsys, Inc., or as expressly provided by the license agreement.
Right to Copy Documentation
The license agreement with Synopsys permits licensee to make copies of the documentation for its internal use only.
Each copy shall include all copyrights, trademarks, service marks, and proprietary rights notices, if any. Licensee must
assign sequential numbers to all copies. These copies shall contain the following legend on the cover page:
“This document is duplicated with the permission of Synopsys, Inc., for the exclusive use of
__________________________________________ and its employees. This is copy number __________.”

Destination Control Statement

All technical data contained in this publication is subject to the export control laws of the United States of America.
Disclosure to nationals of other countries contrary to United States law is prohibited. It is the reader’s responsibility to
determine the applicable regulations and to comply with them.
Disclaimer
SYNOPSYS, INC., AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Registered Trademarks (®)
Synopsys, AMPS, Arcadia, C Level Design, C2HDL, C2V, C2VHDL, Cadabra, Calaveras Algorithm, CATS, CoCentric,
COSSAP, CSim, DelayMill, Design Compiler, DesignPower, DesignWare, Device Model Builder, EPIC, Formality,
HSPICE, Hypermodel, I, iN-Phase, InSpecs, in-Sync, LEDA, MAST, Meta, Meta-Software, ModelAccess, ModelExpress,
ModelTools, PathBlazer, PathMill, Photolynx, Physical Compiler, PowerArc, PowerMill, PrimeTime, RailMill, Raphael,
RapidScript, Saber, SmartLogic, SNUG, SolvNet, Stream Driven Simulator, SiVL, Superlog, System Compiler, Testify,
TetraMAX, TimeMill, TMA, Vera, and Virtual Stepper are registered trademarks of Synopsys, Inc.
Trademarks (™)
abraCAD, abraMAP, Active Parasitics, AFGen, Apollo, Apollo II, Apollo-DPII, Apollo-GA, ApolloGAII, Astro, Astro-Rail,
Astro-Xtalk, Aurora, AvanTestchip, AvanWaves, BCView, Behavioral Compiler, BOA, BRT, Cedar, ChipPlanner, Circuit
Analysis, Columbia, Columbia-CE, Comet 3D, Cosmos, CosmosEnterprise, CosmosLE, CosmosScope, CosmosSE,
Cyclelink, Davinci, DC Expert, DC Expert Plus, DC Professional, DC Ultra, DC Ultra Plus, Design Advisor, Design
Analyzer, DesignerHDL, DesignTime, DFM-Workbench, DFT Compiler, Direct RTL, Direct Silicon Access, DW8051,
DWPCI, Dynamic-Macromodeling, Dynamic Model Switcher, ECL Compiler, ECO Compiler, EDAnavigator, Encore,
Encore PQ, Evaccess, ExpressModel, Floorplan Manager, Formal Model Checker, FormalVera, FoundryModel, FPGA
Compiler II, FPGA Express, Frame Compiler, Frameway, Galaxy, Gatran, HDL Advisor, HDL Compiler, Hercules,
Hercules-Explorer, Hercules-II, Hierarchical Optimization Technology, High Performance Option, HotPlace,
HSPICE-Link, iN-Tandem, Integrator, Interactive Waveform Viewer, iQBus, Jupiter, Jupiter-DP, JupiterXT,
JupiterXT-ASIC, JVXtreme, Liberty, Libra-Passport, Library Compiler, Libra-Visa, LRC, Mars, Mars-Rail, Mars-Xtalk,
Medici, Metacapture, Metacircuit, Metamanager, Metamixsim, Milkyway, ModelSource, Module Compiler, MS-3200,
MS-3400, NanoSim, Nova Product Family, Nova-ExploreRTL, Nova-Trans, Nova-VeriLint, Nova-VHDLlint, OpenVera,
Optimum Silicon, Orion_ec, Parasitic View, Passport, Planet, Planet-PL, Planet-RTL, Polaris, Polaris-CBS, Polaris-MT,
Power Compiler, PowerCODE, PowerGate, ProFPGA, Progen, Prospector, Proteus OPC, Protocol Compiler, PSMGen,
Raphael-NES, RoadRunner, RTL Analyzer, Saturn, ScanBand, Schematic Compiler, Scirocco, Scirocco-i, Shadow
Debugger, Silicon Blueprint, Silicon Early Access, SinglePass-SoC, Smart Extraction, SmartLicense, SmartModel
Library, Softwire, Source-Level Design, Star, Star-DC, Star-MS, Star-MTB, Star-Power, Star-Rail, Star-RC, Star-RCXT,
Star-Sim, Star-Sim XT, Star-Time, Star-XP, SWIFT, Taurus, Taurus-Device, Taurus-Layout, Taurus-Lithography,
Taurus-OPC, Taurus-Process, Taurus-Topography, Taurus-Visual, Taurus-Workbench, The Power in Semiconductors,
TimeSlice, TimeTracker, Timing Annotator, TopoPlace, TopoRoute, Trace-On-Demand, True-Hspice, TSUPREM-4,
TymeWare, VCS, VCS Express, VCSi, Venus, Verification Portal, VFormal, VHDL Compiler, VHDL System Simulator,
VirSim, and VMC are trademarks of Synopsys, Inc.
Service Marks (SM)
DesignSphere, MAP-in, SVP Café, and TAP-in are service marks of Synopsys, Inc.

SystemC is a trademark of the Open SystemC Initiative and is used under license.
AMBA is a trademark of ARM Limited. ARM is a registered trademark of ARM Limited.
All other product or company names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

HSPICE Command Reference, Release U-2003.09-RA, September 2003

Table of Contents

About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

What’s New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv

1. Command Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Alter Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Conditional Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Field Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Input/Output Buffer Information Specification (IBIS) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Library Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Model Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Node Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Output Porting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Simulation Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

iii
 Subcircuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

2. Commands in HSPICE Netlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

.AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
.ALIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
.ALTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
.BIASCHK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
.CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
.DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
.DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
.DCVOLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
.DEL LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
.DISTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
.DOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
.EBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
.ELSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
.ELSEIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
.END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
.ENDDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
.ENDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
.ENDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
.ENDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
.EOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
.FFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
.FOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
.FSOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
.GLOBAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

iv
.GRAPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
.IBIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
.IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
.IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
.INCLUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
.LAYERSTACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
.LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
.LIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
.LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
.MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
.MALIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
.MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
.MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
.MEASURE (Rise, Fall, and Delay Measurements) . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
.MEASURE (Average, RMS, and Peak Measurements) . . . . . . 2-96
.MEASURE (FIND and WHEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
.MEASURE (Equation Evaluation/ Arithmetic Expression) . . . . 2-103
.MEASURE (Average, RMS, MIN, MAX, INTEG, and PP) . . . . 2-105
.MEASURE (Integral Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
.MEASURE (Derivative Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
.MEASURE (Error Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
.MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
.NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
.NODESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
.NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
.OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124

v
 .OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
.PARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
.PKG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
.PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
.PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
.PROBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
.PROTECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
.PZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143
.SAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-145
.SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
.SENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
.SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150
.SHAPE (Defining Rectangles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
.SHAPE (Defining Circles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
.SHAPE (Defining Polygons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
.SHAPE (Defining Strip Polygons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
.STIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
.SUBCKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
.TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
.TF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
.TITLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
.TRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170
.UNPROTECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-175
.VEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
.WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178

vi
3. Options in HSPICE Netlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
.OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
General Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

CPU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Error Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Version Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Model Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
General Model Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
MOSFET Model Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Inductor Model Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
BJT and Diode Model Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
DC Opertaing Point, DC Sweep, and Pole/Zero Options . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
DC Accuracy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
DC Matrix Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
DC Pole/Zero I/O Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
DC Convergence Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
DC Initialization Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Transient and AC Small Signal Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Transient/AC Accuracy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Transient/AC Speed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Transient/AC Timestep Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Transient/AC Algorithm Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

vii
 .BIASCHK Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Transient Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Transient Control Method Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Transient Control Tolerance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Transient Control Limit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Transient Control Matrix Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Iteration Count Dynamic Timestep Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Input/Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

AC Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
.OPTION ABSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
.OPTION ABSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
.OPTION ABSMOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
.OPTION ABSTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
.OPTION ABSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
.OPTION ABSVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
.OPTION ABSVDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
.OPTION ACCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
.OPTION ACCURATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
.OPTION ACOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
.OPTION ALT999 or ALT9999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
.OPTION ALTCHK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
.OPTION ASPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
.OPTION ARTIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
.OPTION AUTOSTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
.OPTION BADCHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

viii
.OPTION BEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
.OPTION BIASFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
.OPTION BIAWARN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
.OPTION BINPRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
.OPTION BKPSIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
.OPTION BRIEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
.OPTION BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
.OPTION BYTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
.OPTION CAPTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
.OPTION CDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
.OPTION CHGTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
.OPTION CO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
.OPTION CONVERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
.OPTION CPTIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
.OPTION CSDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
.OPTION CSHDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
.OPTION CSHUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
.OPTION CVTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
.OPTION D_IBIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
.OPTION DCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
.OPTION DCCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
.OPTION DCFOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
.OPTION DCHOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
.OPTION DCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
.OPTION DCSTEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
.OPTION DCTRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

ix
 .OPTION DEFAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
.OPTION DEFAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
.OPTION DEFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
.OPTION DEFNRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
.OPTION DEFNRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
.OPTION DEFPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
.OPTION DEFPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
.OPTION DEFW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
.OPTION DELMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
.OPTION DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
.OPTION DIAGNOSTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
.OPTION DLENCSDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
.OPTION DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
.OPTION DVDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
.OPTION DVTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
.OPTION EPSMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
.OPTION EXPLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
.OPTION EXPMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
.OPTION FAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
.OPTION FFTOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
.OPTION FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
.OPTION FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
.OPTION GENK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
.OPTION GMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
.OPTION GMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
.OPTION GMINDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81

x
.OPTION GRAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
.OPTION GSHUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
.OPTION H9007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
.OPTION HIER_SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
.OPTION ICSWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
.OPTION IMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
.OPTION IMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
.OPTION INGOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
.OPTION INTERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
.OPTION ITL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
.OPTION ITL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
.OPTION ITL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
.OPTION ITL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
.OPTION ITL5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
.OPTION ITLPTRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
.OPTION ITLPZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
.OPTION ITRPRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
.OPTION KCLTEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
.OPTION KLIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
.OPTION LENNAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
.OPTION LIMPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
.OPTION LIMTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
.OPTION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
.OPTION LVLTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
.OPTION MAXAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
.OPTION MAXORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107

xi
 .OPTION MBYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
.OPTION MEASDGT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
.OPTION MEASFAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
.OPTION MEASSORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
.OPTION MEASOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
.OPTION MENTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
.OPTION METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
.OPTION MODMONTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
.OPTION MODSRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
.OPTION MONTECON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
.OPTION MU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
.OPTION NEWTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
.OPTION NODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
.OPTION NOELCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
.OPTION NOMOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
.OPTION NOPAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
.OPTION NOPIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
.OPTION NOTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
.OPTION NOWARN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
.OPTION NUMDGT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
.OPTION NXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
.OPTION OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
.OPTION OPTLST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
.OPTION OPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
.OPTION PARHIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
.OPTION PATHNUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134

xii
.OPTION PIVOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135
.OPTION PIVREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
.OPTION PIVREL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
.OPTION PIVTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
.OPTION PLIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
.OPTION POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
.OPTION POST_VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
.OPTION PROBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143
.OPTION PSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
.OPTION PURETP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-145
.OPTION PUTMEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
.OPTION RELH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
.OPTION RELI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
.OPTION RELMOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-149
.OPTION RELQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
.OPTION RELTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-151
.OPTION RELV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-152
.OPTION RELVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
.OPTION RELVDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154
.OPTION RESMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-155
.OPTION RISETIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-156
.OPTION RMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-157
.OPTION RMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158
.OPTION SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
.OPTION SCALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-160
.OPTION SDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161

xiii
 .OPTION SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
.OPTION SEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
.OPTION SLOPETOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
.OPTION SPARSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165
.OPTION SPICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166
.OPTION STATFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
.OPTION TIMERES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
.OPTION TNOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-170
.OPTION TRCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171
.OPTION TRTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173
.OPTION UNWRAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-174
.OPTION VERIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
.OPTION VFLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176
.OPTION VNTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177
.OPTION WARNLIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
.OPTION WL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-179
.OPTION XDTEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-180
.OPTION ZUKEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN-1

xiv
Preface FIX ME!

This preface includes the following sections:

• About this Manual

• What’s New
• Customer Support

xvii
About this Manual
The HSPICE Command Reference describes how to use HSPICE to
maintain signal integrity in your chip design.

Audience
This manual is for circuit designers and engineers who use
Synopsys HSPICE for circuit simulation and analysis.

Related Publications
For additional information about the HSPICE Command Reference,
see

• Synopsys Online Documentation (SOLD), which is included with

the software for CD users or is available to download through the
Synopsys Electronic Software Transfer (EST) system

• Documentation on the Web, which is available through SolvNet

at http://solvnet.synopsys.com
• The Synopsys MediaDocs Shop, from which you can order
printed copies of Synopsys documents, at
http://mediadocs.synopsys.com

Preface About this Manual

xviii
 You might also want to refer to the documentation for the following
related Synopsys products:

• HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide

• HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide

• HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual

• HSPICE MOSFET Models Manual

• HSPICE Command Reference

What’s New
This manual is only available online.

New Features
See the Release Notes for information about new features and last-
minute changes.

Conventions
This manual uses certain style conventions to indicate functions,
node/port names (in C code), examples, and file names.

Preface What’s New

xix
 Commands
SYNTAX:

command_name[argument(s)]

argument types: keyword | value | tag=value | tag=keyword

Command Argument Definition

keyword Keywords are identifiers that must be used as they
appear. They are shown in base font.
value Values are user-determined. They are shown in italic
text to distinguish them from commands and
keywords.
tag= Tags can be followed by either a value or a keyword.
value Tags and keywords are in the base font. Argument
keyword values are in italics to distinguish them from
commands, keywords, and tags.

Symbol Definition
| A pipe symbol ( | ) represents the word “or” and separates
choices between two or more arguments.
... An ellipsis (...) indicates that more than one argument can
be specified. Ellipses are used only for multiple arguments
with tags.
[] Open and closed square brackets indicate that the
enclosed argument is optional.
() Open and closed parenthesis indicate that there is a
choice between the enclosed arguments (two or more).
These are used only when a command has several groups
of argument choices; multiple pipe symbols ( | ), in this
case, would result in an ambiguous syntax.

Preface Conventions
xx
SYNTAX:

report_node_i a[vg] | r[ms] | p[eak] | h[ist] node_name(s)

For this command, a[vg], r[ms], p[eak], and h[ist] are keywords–
choose one of these. The node_name(s) are user-determined.

EXAMPLE 1:

report_node_i a VDD GND

In this example, a is a keyword, and VDD and GND are values.

SYNTAX:

report_node_ic [a[ll]] [q[uoted]] [for=epic | spice] [time(s)]

For this command, a[ll] and q[uoted] are optional keywords. The tag
for= is part of an optional argument for which you can choose the
keyword epic or spice. The time(s) are user-determined and, in this
case, optional.

EXAMPLE 2:

report_node_ic all for=spice 1u

In this example, all is a keyword, for= is a tag, spice is a
keyword, and 1u is a value.

Menu Text, File Names, and Examples

Menu text appears in bold, as shown in the following example.

Preface Conventions
xxi
 EXAMPLE 1:

To start setting up a run, select File > Design Data Setup.

File names are shown in the same font as the surrounding text, but
in italics.

EXAMPLE 2:

This is an example of a file_name.out being shown in text.

Examples are shown in a courier font as they might appear on your

screen. Each example is followed by an explanation. Anything
shown in the example that appears in the explanation is shown in the
same courier font used in the example.

EXAMPLE 3:

add_node_cap RS100 275

In the example, the capacitance value of node RS100 is increased
by 275 femtofarads.

Functions
SYNTAX:

int fmDelayDrive(delay, port_id, w, l)

For this command, int is the data type of the function and delay,
port_id, w, and l are user-determined parameters.

Preface Conventions
xxii
DESCRIPTION:

Each function description includes a table that provides the data type
and description for each function parameter.

Data Type Parameter Description

double delay Delay time in 0.01 ns.
char * port_name The name of the port for which the
intrinsic delay time will be set.
double w Width specified in 0.01 µ.
double l Length specified in 0.01 µ.

Some functions (few) have an alternate syntax that includes 0.0 as

a keyword. Because this parameter is not user-determined, it is not
shown in italic text and must be typed as is.

Port/Node Names and Examples

Names of ports and nodes are always specified in double quotes.
This is a standard of the C programming language.

EXAMPLE 1:

fmDisablePort("out");
For each example there is a corresponding explanation. Anything
shown in the example that appears in the explanation is shown in the
same courier font used in the example.

EXAMPLE 2:

fmDisablePortById(out_id);
This example disables the port with ID previously defined as out_id
for the current model.

Preface Conventions
xxiii
Customer Support
Customer support is available through SolvNet online customer
support and through contacting the Synopsys Technical Support
Center.

Accessing SolvNet
SolvNet includes an electronic knowledge base of technical articles
and answers to frequently asked questions about Synopsys tools.
SolvNet also gives you access to a wide range of Synopsys online
services including software downloads, documentation on the Web,
and “Enter a Call With the Support Center.”

To access SolvNet:

1. Go to the SolvNet Web page at http://solvnet.synopsys.com/.

2. If prompted, enter your user name and password. (If you do not
have a Synopsys user name and password, click New Synopsys
User Registration.)
If you need help using SolvNet, click SolvNet Help in the column on
the left side of the SolvNet Web page.

Preface Customer Support

xxiv
Contacting the Synopsys Technical Support Center
If you have problems, questions, or suggestions, you can contact the
Synopsys Technical Support Center in the following ways:

• Open a call to your local support center from the Web.

- Go to http://solvnet.synopsys.com (Synopsys user name and

password required) and click “Enter a Call With the Support
Center.”
• Send an e-mail message to [email protected].
• Telephone your local support center.

- Call (800) 245-8005 from within the continental United States.

- Call (650) 584-4200 from Canada.

- Find other local support center telephone numbers at
http://www.synopsys.com/support/support_ctr.

Preface Customer Support

xxv
Preface Customer Support
xxvi
1
Command Categories 1
This chapter lists all commands that you can use in HSPICE,
arranged by the tasks that use each command.

Alter Blocks
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to run alternative
simulations of your netlist, using different data.
.ALIAS .TEMP
.ALTER
.DEL LIB

1-1
 Analysis
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to start different types
of HSPICE analysis, to save the simulation results into a file, and to
load the results of a previous simulation into a new simulation.
.AC .PZ
.DC .SAMPLE
.DISTO .SENS
.ENDDATA .TEMP
.FFT .TF
.FOUR .TRAN
.LIN
.NET
.NOISE
.OP

Conditional Block
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to setup a conditional
block. HSPICE does not execute the commands in the conditional
block, unless the specified conditions are true.
.ELSE .ENDIF
.ELSEIF .IF

Encryption
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to mark the start and
end of an encrypted section of a netlist.
.PROTECT .UNPROTECT

Command Categories:
1-2
 Field Solver
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to define a field solver.
.FSOPTIONS .MATERIAL
.LAYERSTACK .SHAPE

Input/Output Buffer Information Specification (IBIS)

Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist for specifying input/
output buffer information.
.EBD .PKG
.IBIS

Library Management
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to manage libraries of
circuit designs, and to call other files when simulating your netlist.
.DEL LIB .UNPROTECT
.ENDL .VEC
.INCLUDE
.LIB
.PROTECT

Model Definition
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to define models.
.MALIAS .MODEL

Command Categories:
1-3
 Node Naming
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to name nodes in
circuit designs.
.CONNECT .GLOBAL

Output Porting
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to specify the output of
a simulation, to a printer, plotter, or graph. You can also define the
parameters to measure, and to report in the simulation output.
.BIASCHK .PLOT
.DOUT .PRINT
.GRAPH .PROBE
.MEASURE .STIM
.WIDTH

Setup
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to setup your netlist for
simulation.
.DATA .OPTION
.DCVOLT .PARAM
.GLOBAL .SAVE
.IC .TITLE
.LOAD .VEC
.NODESET

Command Categories:
1-4
 Simulation Runs
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to mark the start and
end of individual simulation runs, and conditions that apply
throughout an individual simulation run.
.END .TITLE
.TEMP

Subcircuits
Use these commands in your HSPICE netlist to define subcircuits,
and to add instances of subcircuits to your netlist.
.ENDS .MACRO
.EOM .MODEL
.INCLUDE .SUBCKT

Command Categories:
1-5
Command Categories:
1-6
2
Commands in HSPICE Netlists 2
This chapter contains an alphabetical listing of all commands that
you can use in an HSPICE netlist. For a list of commands grouped
according to tasks that use each command, see Chapter 1,
“Command Categories.”

• .AC

• .ALIAS
• .ALTER

• .BIASCHK

• .CONNECT
• .DATA

• .DC
• .DCVOLT

2-1
 • .DEL LIB
• .DISTO
• .DOUT

• .EBD

• .ELSE
• .ELSEIF
• .END

• .ENDDATA
• .ENDIF

• .ENDL
• .ENDS
• .EOM
• .FFT

• .FOUR
• .FSOPTIONS

• .GLOBAL
• .GRAPH
• .IBIS

• .IC

• .IF
• .INCLUDE

Commands in HSPICE Netlists:

2-2
• .LAYERSTACK

• .LIB
• .LIN
• .LOAD

• .MACRO
• .MALIAS

• .MATERIAL

• .MEASURE
• .MODEL

• .NET
• .NODESET

• .NOISE
• .OP
• .OPTION
• .PARAM

• .PKG
• .PLOT
• .PRINT

• .PROBE

• .PROTECT
• .PZ

• .SAMPLE

Commands in HSPICE Netlists:

2-3
 • .SAVE
• .SENS
• .SHAPE

• .STIM

• .SUBCKT
• .TEMP
• .TF

• .TITLE
• .TRAN

• .UNPROTECT
• .VEC
• .WIDTH

Commands in HSPICE Netlists:

2-4
.AC

SYNTAX:
Single/Double Sweep
.AC type np fstart fstop
.AC type np fstart fstop <SWEEP var <START=>start
+ <STOP=>stop <STEP=>incr>
.AC type np fstart fstop <SWEEP var type np start stop>
.AC type np fstart fstop
+ <SWEEP var START="param_expr1"
+ STOP="param_expr2" STEP="param_expr3">
.AC type np fstart fstop <SWEEP var start_expr
+ stop_expr step_expr>
Sweep Using Parameters
.AC type np fstart fstop <SWEEP DATA = datanm>
.AC DATA = datanm
.AC DATA = datanm <SWEEP var <START=>start
<STOP=>stop
+ <STEP=>incr>
.AC DATA = datanm <SWEEP var type np start stop>
.AC DATA = datanm <SWEEP var START="param_expr1"
+ STOP="param_expr2" STEP="param_expr3">
.AC DATA = datanm <SWEEP var start_expr stop_expr
+ step_expr>
Optimization
.AC DATA = datanm OPTIMIZE = opt_par_fun
+ RESULTS = measnames MODEL = optmod

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .AC

2-5
 Random/Monte Carlo
.AC type np fstart fstop <SWEEP MONTE = val>

EXAMPLE 1:
.AC DEC 10 1K 100MEG
This example performs a frequency sweep, by 10 points per
decade, from 1 kHz to 100 MHz.

EXAMPLE 2:
.AC LIN 100 1 100HZ
This example runs a 100-point frequency sweep from 1 Hz
to 100 Hz.

EXAMPLE 3:
.AC DEC 10 1 10K SWEEP cload LIN 20 1pf 10pf
This example performs an AC analysis, for each value of
cload. This results from a linear sweep of cload between 1
pF and 10 pF (20 points), sweeping the frequency by 10
points per decade, from 1 Hz to 10 kHz.
EXAMPLE 4:
.AC DEC 10 1 10K SWEEP rx POI 2 5k 15k
This example performs an AC analysis, for each value of rx,
5 k and 15 k, sweeping the frequency by 10 points per
decade, from 1 Hz to 10 kHz.
EXAMPLE 5:
.AC DEC 10 1 10K SWEEP DATA = datanm
This example uses the .DATA statement to perform a series
of AC analyses, modifying more than one parameter. The
datanm file contains the parameters.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .AC

2-6
EXAMPLE 6:
.AC DEC 10 1 10K SWEEP MONTE = 30
This example illustrates a frequency sweep, and a Monte
Carlo analysis, with 30 trials.

DESCRIPTION:
You can use the .AC statement in several different formats,
depending on the application, as shown in the examples
below. You can also use the .AC statement to perform data-
driven analysis in HSPICE.
If the input file includes an .AC statement, HSPICE runs AC
analysis for the circuit, over a selected frequency range, for
each parameter in the second sweep.
For AC analysis, the data file must include at least one
independent AC source element statement (for example, VI
INPUT GND AC 1V). HSPICE checks for this condition, and
reports a fatal error if you did not specify such AC sources.

Command
Definition
Argument

DATA = datanm Data name, referenced in the .AC statement

incr Increment value of the voltage, current, element, or

model parameter. If you use type variation, specify the
np (number of points) instead of incr.

fstart Starting frequency. If you use POI (list of points) type

variation, use a list of frequency values, not fstart
fstop.

fstop Final frequency.

MONTE = val Produces a number (val) of randomly-generated

values. HSPICE uses these values to select
parameters from a distribution, either Gaussian,
Uniform, or Random Limit.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .AC

2-7
 Command
Definition
Argument

np Number of points, or points per decade or octave,

depending on which keyword precedes it.

start Starting voltage or current, or any parameter value for

an element or model.

stop Final voltage or current, or any parameter value for an

element or a model.

SWEEP This keyword indicates that the .AC statement

specifies a second sweep.

TEMP This keyword indicates a temperature sweep

type Can be any of the following keywords:

• DEC – decade variation.
• OCT – octave variation.
• LIN – linear variation.
• POI – list of points.

var Name of an independent voltage or current source,

element or model parameter, or the TEMP
(temperature sweep) keyword. HSPICE supports
source value sweep, referring to the source name
(SPICE style). If you select a parameter sweep,
a .DATA statement, and a temperature sweep, then
you must choose a parameter name for the source
value. You must also later refer to it in the .AC
statement. The parameter name cannot start with
V or I.

SEE ALSO:
.DC
.TRAN

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .AC

2-8
.ALIAS

SYNTAX:
.ALIAS <model_name1> <model_name2>

EXAMPLE 1:
You delete a library named poweramp, that contains a model
named pa1. Another library contains an equivalent model
named par1. You can then alias the pa1 model name to the
par1 model name:
.ALIAS pa1 par1
During simulation, when HSPICE encounters a model
named pa1 in your netlist, it initially cannot find this model,
because you used a .ALTER statement to delete the library
that contained this model. However, the .ALIAS statement
indicates to use the par1 model, in place of the old pa1
model. HSPICE does find this new model in another library,
so simulation continues.
You must specify an old model name and a new model name
to use in its place. You cannot use .ALIAS without any
model names:
.ALIAS
or with only one model name:
.ALIAS pa1
You also cannot alias a model name to more than one model
name, because then the simulator would not know which of
these new models to use in place of the deleted or renamed
model:
.ALIAS pa1 par1 par2

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ALIAS

2-9
 For the same reason, you cannot alias a model name to a
second model name, and then alias the second model name
to a third model name:
.ALIAS pa1 par1
.ALIAS par1 par2
If your netlist does not contain a .ALTER command, and if
the .ALIAS does not report a usage error, then the .ALIAS
does not affect the simulation results.

EXAMPLE 2:
Your netlist might contain the statement:
.ALIAS myfet nfet
Without a .ALTER statement, HSPICE does not use nfet to
replace myfet during simulation.
If your netlist contains one or more .ALTER commands, the
first simulation uses the original myfet model. After the first
simulation, if the netlist references myfet from a deleted
library, .ALIAS substitutes nfet in place of the missing
model.
• If HSPICE finds model definitions for both myfet and nfet,
it reports an error and aborts.
• If HSPICE finds a model definition for myfet, but not for
nfet, it reports a warning, and simulation continues, using
the original myfet model.

• If HSPICE finds a model definition for nfet, but not for

myfet, it reports a replacement successful message.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ALIAS

2-10
DESCRIPTION:
You can use .ALTER statements to rename a model, to
rename a library containing a model, or to delete an entire
library of models in HSPICE. If your netlist references the old
model name, then after you use one of these types
of .ALTER statements, HSPICE no longer finds this model.
For example, if you use .DEL LIB in the .ALTER block to
delete a library, the .ALTER command deletes all models in
this library. If your netlist references one or more models in
the deleted library, then HSPICE no longer finds the models.
To resolve this issue, HSPICE provides a .ALIAS command,
to let you alias the old model name to another model name
that HSPICE can find in the existing model libraries.
SEE ALSO:
.MALIAS

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ALIAS

2-11
.ALTER

SYNTAX:
.ALTER <title_string>

EXAMPLE:
.ALTER simulation_run2

DESCRIPTION:
You can use the .ALTER statement to rerun an HSPICE
simulation, using different parameters and data.
Use parameter (variable) values for print and plot
statements, before you alter them. The .ALTER block
cannot include .PRINT, .PLOT, .GRAPH or any other input/
output statements. You can include analysis statements
(.DC, .AC, .TRAN, .FOUR, .DISTO, .PZ, and so on) in
a .ALTER block in an input netlist file.
However, if you change only the analysis type, and you do
not change the circuit itself, then simulation runs faster if you
specify all analysis types in one block, instead of using
separate .ALTER blocks for each analysis type.
The .ALTER sequence or block can contain:
• Element statements (except source elements)
• .DATA statements

• .DEL LIB statements

• .INCLUDE statements

• .IC (initial condition) and .NODESET statements

• .LIB statements
• .MODEL statements

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ALTER

2-12
• .OP statements
• .OPTION statements
• .PARAM statements

• .TEMP statements

• .TF statements
• .TRAN, .DC, and .AC statements
• .ALIAS statements

Command
Definition
Argument

title_string Any string up to 72 characters. HSPICE prints the

appropriate title string for each .ALTER run, in each section
heading of the output listing, and in the graph data (.tr#)
files.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ALTER

2-13
.BIASCHK

SYNTAX:
.BIASCHK type terminal1=t1 terminal2=t2 limit=lim
+ <noise=ns><name=devname1><name=devname2>...
+ <mname=modelname1><mname=modelname2> ...
* Check transistor mode of operation
.BIASCHK type region=<region>
+ <name=devname1> <name=devname2> ...
+ <mname=modelname1> <mname=modelname2>

EXAMPLE:
.BIASCHK NMOS terminal1=ng terminal2=nb limit=2v
+ noise=0.01v name=x1.x3.m1 mname=nch.1 name=m3

DESCRIPTION:
Breakdown can occur if a voltage bias between some
terminals of an element is too large. The .BIASCHK
statement monitors the voltage bias, using the limits and
noise that you define. Bias monitoring checks the specified
bias, during transient analysis, and reports:
• Element name
• Time

• Terminals

• Bias that exceeds the limit

• Number of times the bias exceeds the limit for an element

HSPICE saves the information as both a warning and a

BIASCHK summary, in the *.lis file.
You can use this command only for active elements and
capacitors.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .BIASCHK

2-14
A .BIASCHK statement might check for voltages that
exceed a specified limit, for MOS dielectric breakdown.
BIASCHK can check voltages from the gate, to the source,
drain, or bulk.
BIASCHK cannot detect the bias that exceeds the limit, if the
bias is always the same value during transient analysis.
If a model name, referenced in an active element statement,
contains a period (.), then .BIASCHK reports an error. This
occurs because it is unclear whether a reference such as
x.123 is a model name or a sub-circuit name (123 model in
the x sub-circuit).
Instance (element) and model names can contain wildcards,
either ? (stands for one character) or * (stands for 0 or more
characters).
If you do not set name and mname, HSPICE checks all
elements of this type for bias voltage (you must include type
in the .biaschk card).
You can use a wild card, to describe name and mname, in
the biaschk card.
• ? stands for one character.

• * stands for 0 or more characters.

Command
Definition
Argument

type Element type to check

MOS (R, C ...)
In the first syntax, the type can be DIODE, BIPOLAR, BJT,
JFET, MOS, NMOS, PMOS, or C. In the second syntax,
that specifies a region, type must be MOS.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .BIASCHK

2-15
 Command
Definition
Argument

terminal 1, 2 Terminals, between which HSPICE checks (that is, checks

between terminal1 and terminal2):
• For MOS level 57: nd, ng, ns, ne, np, n6
• For MOS level 58: nd, ngf, ns, ngb
• For MOS level 59: nd, ng, ns, ne, np
• For other MOS level: nd, ng, ns, nb
• For capacitor: n1, n2
• For diode: np, nn
• For bipolar: nc, nb, ne, ns
• For JFET: nd, ng, ns, nb

limit Biaschk limit that you define. Reports an error, if the bias
voltage (between appointed terminals, of appointed
elements and models), is larger than the limit.

noise Biaschk noise that you define. The default is 0.1v.

Noise-filter some of the results (the local maximum bias
voltage, that is larger than the limit).
The next local max replaces the local max, if all of the
following conditions are satisfied:
local_max-local_min<noise>.
next local_max-local_min<noise>.
This local max is smaller than the next local max. For a
parasitic diode, HSPICE ignores the smaller local max
biased voltage, and does not output this voltage.
To disable this feature, set the noise detection level to 0.

name Element name to check.

mname Model name. HSPICE checks elements of the model for

bias.

region Values can be cutoff, linear, or saturation. HSPICE

monitors when the MOS device, defined in the .biaschk
command, enters and leaves the specified region (such as
cutoff).

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .BIASCHK

2-16
.CONNECT

SYNTAX:
.CONNECT node1 node2

EXAMPLE 1:
...
.subckt eye_diagram node1 node2 ...
.connect node1 node2
...
.ends
This is now the same as the following:
...
.subckt eye_diagram node1 node1 ...
...
.ends
...
HSPICE reports the following error message:
**error**: subcircuit definition duplicates node
node1
To apply any HSPICE statement to node2, apply it to node1
instead. Then, to change the netlist construction to
recognize node2, use a .ALTER statement.

EXAMPLE 2:
*example for .connect
vcc 0 cc 5v
r1 0 1 5k
r2 1 cc 5k
.tran 1n 10n
.print i(vcc) v(1)
.alter
.connect cc 1
.end

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .CONNECT

2-17
 The first .TRAN simulation includes two resistors. Later
simulations have only one resistor, because r2 is shorted by
connecting cc with 1. v(1) does not print out, but v(cc) prints
out instead.
Use multiple .CONNECT statements to connect several
nodes together.

EXAMPLE 3:
.CONNECT node1 node2
.CONNECT node2 node3
This example connects both node2 and node3 to node1. All
connected nodes must be in the same subcircuit, or all in the
main circuit. The first HSPICE simulation evaluates only
node1; node2, and node3 are the same node as node1.
Use .ALTER statements to simulate node2 and node3.
If you set .OPTION NODE, then HSPICE prints out a node
connection table.
DESCRIPTION:
The .CONNECT statement connects two nodes in your
HSPICE netlist, so that simulation evaluates two nodes as
only one node. Both nodes must be at the same level in the
circuit design that you are simulating: you cannot connect
nodes that belong to different subcircuits.
If you connect node2 to node1, HSPICE does not recognize
node2 at all.
Command
Definition
Argument

node1 Name of the first of two nodes to connect to each other.

node2 Name of the second of two nodes to connect to each other.

The first node replaces this node in the simulation.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .CONNECT

2-18
.DATA

SYNTAX:

• Inline .DATA statement:

.DATA datanm pnam1 <pnam2 pnam3 ... pnamxxx >

+ pval1<pval2 pval3 ... pvalxxx>
+ pval1’ <pval2’ pval3’ ... pvalxxx’>
.ENDDATA

• External File .DATA statement, for concatenated data

files:

.DATA datanm MER

FILE = ’filename1’ pname1 = colnum
+ <pname2 = colnum ...>
<FILE = ’filename2’ pname1 = colnum
+ <pname2 = colnum ...>>
...
<OUT = ’fileout’>
.ENDDATA

• Column Laminated .DATA statement:

.DATA datanm LAM
FILE = ’filename1’ pname1 = colnum
+ <panme2 = colnum ...>
<FILE = ’filename2’ pname1 = colnum
+ <pname2 = colnum ...>>
...
<OUT = ’fileout’>
.ENDDATA

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DATA

2-19
 EXAMPLE 1:
* Inline .DATA statement
.TRAN 1n 100n SWEEP DATA = devinf
.AC DEC 10 1hz 10khz SWEEP DATA = devinf
.DC TEMP -55 125 10 SWEEP DATA = devinf
.DATA devinfwidth length thresh cap
+ 50u 30u 1.2v 1.2pf
+ 25u 15u 1.0v 0.8pf
+ 5u 2u 0.7v 0.6pf
.ENDDATA
HSPICE performs the above analyses for each set of
parameter values defined in the .DATA statement. For
example, the program first uses the width = 50u,
length = 30u, thresh = 1.2v, and cap = 1.2pf parameters to
perform .TRAN, .AC, and .DC analyses.
HSPICE then repeats the analyses for width = 25u,
length = 15u, thresh = 1.0v, and cap = 0.8pf, and again for
the values on each subsequent line in the .DATA block.

EXAMPLE 2:
* .DATA as the inner sweep
M1 1 2 3 0 N W = 50u L = LN
VGS 2 0 0.0v
VBS 3 0 VBS
VDS 1 0 VDS
.PARAM VDS = 0 VBS = 0 L = 1.0u
.DC DATA = vdot
.DATA vdot
VBS VDS L
0 0.1 1.5u
0 0.1 1.0u
0 0.1 0.8u
-1 0.1 1.0u
-2 0.1 1.0u
-3 0.1 1.0u
0 1.0 1.0u
0 5.0 1.0u
.ENDDATA

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DATA

2-20
This example performs a DC sweep analysis for each set of
VBS, VDS, and L parameters in the .DATA vdot block. That
is, HSPICE runs eight DC analyses, one for each line of
parameter values in the .DATA block.

EXAMPLE 3:
* .DATA as the outer sweep
.PARAM W1 = 50u W2 = 50u L = 1u CAP = 0
.TRAN 1n 100n SWEEP DATA = d1
.DATA d1
W1 W2 L CAP
50u 40u 1.0u 1.2pf
25u 20u 0.8u 0.9pf
.ENDDATA
In this example:
• The default start time for the .TRAN analysis is 0.
• The time increment is 1 ns.
• The stop time is 100 ns.

This results in transient analyses at every time value from 0

to 100 ns, in steps of 1 ns, using the first set of parameter
values in the .DATA d1 block. Then HSPICE reads the next
set of parameter values, and performs another 100 transient
analyses. It sweeps time from 0 to 100 ns, in 1 ns steps. The
outer sweep is time, and the inner sweep varies the
parameter values. HSPICE performs two hundred analyses:
100 time increments, times 2 sets of parameter values.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DATA

2-21
 EXAMPLE 4:
* External File .DATA, for concatenated data files
.DATA datanm MER
+ FILE = filename1 pname1 = colnum
+ <pname2 = colnum ...>
+ <FILE = filename2 pname1 = colnum
+ <pname2 = colnum ...>>
+ ...
+ <OUT = fileout>
.ENDDATA

EXAMPLE 5:
If you concatenate the three files (file1, file2, and file3).
file1 file2 file3
a a a b b b c c c
a a a b b b c c c
a a a
The data appears as follows:
a a a
a a a
a a a
b b b
b b b
c c c
c c c
The number of lines (rows) of data in each file does not need
to be the same. The simulator assumes that the associated
parameter of each column of the A file is the same as each
column of the other files.
The .DATA statement for this example is:
* External File .DATA statement
.DATA inputdata MER
FILE = ‘file1’ p1 = 1 p2 = 3 p3 = 4
FILE = ‘file2’ p1 = 1
FILE = ‘file3’
.ENDDATA

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DATA

2-22
This listing concatenates file1, file2, and file3, to form the
inputdata dataset. The data in file1 is at the top of the file,
followed by the data in file2, and file3. The inputdata in
the .DATA statement references the dataname specified in
either the .DC, .AC, or .TRAN analysis statements. The
parameter fields specify the column that contains the
parameters (you must already have defined the parameter
names in .PARAM statements). For example, the values for
the p1 parameter are in column 1 of file1 and file2. The
values for the p2 parameter are in column 3 of file1.
For data files with fewer columns than others, HSPICE
assigns values of zero to the missing parameters.

EXAMPLE 6:
Three files (D, E, and F) contain the following columns of
data:
File D File E File F
d1 d2 d3 e4 e5 f6
d1 d2 d3 e4 e5 f6
d1 d2 d3 e4 e5 f6
The laminated data appears as follows:
d1 d2 d3 e4 e5 f6
d1 d2 d3 e4 e5 f6
d1 d2 d3 e4 e5 f6
The number of columns of data does not need to be the
same in the three files.
The number of lines (rows) of data in each file does not need
to be the same. HSPICE interprets missing data points as
zero.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DATA

2-23
 The .DATA statement for this example is:
* Column-Laminated .DATA statement
.DATA dataname LAM
FILE = ‘file1’ p1 = 1 p2 = 2 p3 = 3
FILE = ‘file2’ p4 = 1 p5 = 2
OUT = ‘fileout’
.ENDDATA
This listing laminates columns from file1, and file2, into the
fileout output file. Columns one, two, and three of file1, and
columns one and two of file2, are designated as the columns
to place in the output file. You can specify up to 10 files
per .DATA statement.
If you run HSPICE on a different machine than the one on
which the input data files reside (such as when you work
over a network), use full path names instead of aliases.
Aliases might have different definitions on different
machines.

DESCRIPTION:
Data-driven analysis syntax requires a .DATA statement,
and an analysis statement that contains a DATA = dataname
keyword.
You can use the .DATA statement to concatenate or column-
laminate data sets, to optimize measured I-V, C-V, transient,
or s-parameter data.
You can also use the .DATA statement for a first or second
sweep variable, when you characterize cells, and test worst-
case corners. Simulation reads data measured in a lab, such
as transistor I-V data, one transistor at a time, in an outer
analysis loop. Within the outer loop, the analysis reads data
for each transistor (IDS curve, GDS curve, and so on), one
curve at a time, in an inner analysis loop.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DATA

2-24
The .DATA statement specifies parameters that change
values, and the sets of values to assign during each
simulation. The required simulations run as an internal loop.
This bypasses reading-in the netlist and setting-up the
simulation, which saves computing time. In internal loop
simulation, you can also plot simulation results against each
other, and print them in a single output.
You can enter any number of parameters in a .DATA block.
The .AC, .DC, and .TRAN statements can use external and
inline data provided in .DATA statements. The number of
data values per line does not need to correspond to the
number of parameters. For example, you do not need to
enter 20 values on each line in the .DATA block, if each
simulation pass requires 20 parameters: the program reads
20 values on each pass, no matter how you format the
values.
Each .DATA statement can contain up to 50 parameters. If
you need more than 50 parameters in a single .DATA
statement, place 50 or fewer parameters in the .DATA
statement, and use .ALTER statements for the remaining
parameters.
HSPICE refers to .DATA statements by their datanames, so
each dataname must be unique. HSPICE support three
.DATA statement formats:

• Inline data, which is parameter data, listed in a .DATA

statement block. The datanm parameter, in a .DC, .AC,
or .TRAN analysis statement, calls this statement. The
number of parameters that HSPICE reads, determines
the number of columns of data. The physical number of
data numbers per line does not need to correspond to the
number of parameters. For example, if the simulation
needs 20 parameters, you do not need 20 numbers per
line.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DATA

2-25
 • Data that is concatenated from external files.
Concatenated data files are files with the same number
of columns, placed one after another.

• Data that is column-laminated from external files.

Column lamination means that the columns of files with
the same number of rows, are arranged side-by-side.
To use external files with the .DATA format:
• Use the MER and LAM keywords to tell HSPICE to
expect external file data, rather than inline data.
• Use the FILE keyword to specify the external filename.

• You can use simple file names, such as out.dat, without

the single or double quotes ( ‘ ’ or “ ”), but use the quotes
when file names start with numbers, such as “1234.dat”.

• File names are case sensitive on Unix systems.

For data-driven analysis, specify the start time (time 0) in the
analysis statement, so analysis correctly calculates the stop
time.
The following shows how different types of analysis use
.DATA statements.
Operating point:
.DC DATA = dataname
DC sweep:
.DC vin 1 5 .25 SWEEP DATA = dataname
AC sweep:
.AC dec 10 100 10meg SWEEP DATA = dataname
TRAN sweep:
.TRAN 1n 10n SWEEP DATA = dataname

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DATA

2-26
Command
Definition
Argument

colnum Column number in the data file, for the parameter value. The
column does not need to be the same between files.

datanm Data name, referenced in the .TRAN, .DC, or .AC statement.

filenamei Data file to read. HSPICE concatenates files in the order they
appear in the .DATA statement. You can specify up to 10 files.

fileouti Data file name, where simulation writes concatenated data.

This file contains the full syntax for an inline .DATA statement,
and can replace the .DATA statement that created it in the
netlist. You can output the file, and use it to generate one data
file from many.

LAM Column-laminated (parallel merging) data files to use.

MER Concatenated (series merging) data files to use.

pnami Parameter names, used for source value, element value,

device size, model parameter value, and so on. You must
declare these names in a .PARAM statement.

pvali Parameter value.

SEE ALSO:
.ENDDATA

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DATA

2-27
.DC

SYNTAX:
Sweep or Parameterized Sweep:
.DC var1 START = start1 STOP = stop1 STEP = incr1
.DC var1 START = <param_expr1>
+ STOP = <param_expr2> STEP = <param_expr3>
.DC var1 start1 stop1 incr1
+ <SWEEP var2 type np start2 stop2>
.DC var1 start1 stop1 incr1 <var2 start2 stop2 incr2>
Data-Driven Sweep:
.DC var1 type np start1 stop1 <SWEEP DATA = datanm>
.DC DATA = datanm<SWEEP var2 start2 stop2 incr2>
.DC DATA = datanm
Monte Carlo:
.DC var1 type np start1 stop1 <SWEEP MONTE = val>
.DC MONTE = val
Optimization:
.DC DATA = datanm OPTIMIZE = opt_par_fun
+ RESULTS = measnames MODEL = optmod
.DC var1 start1 stop1 SWEEP OPTIMIZE = OPTxxx
+ RESULTS = measname MODEL = optmod

EXAMPLE 1:
.DC VIN 0.25 5.0 0.25
This example sweeps the value of the VIN voltage source,
from 0.25 volts to 5.0 volts, in increments of 0.25 volts.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DC

2-28
EXAMPLE 2:
.DC VDS 0 10 0.5 VGS 0 5 1
This example sweeps the drain-to-source voltage, from 0 to
10 V, in 0.5 V increments, at VGS values of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and
5 V.

EXAMPLE 3:
.DC TEMP -55 125 10
This example starts a DC analysis of the circuit, from -55°C
to 125°C, in 10°C increments.

EXAMPLE 4:
.DC TEMP POI 5 0 30 50 100 125
This script runs a DC analysis, at five temperatures: 0, 30,
50, 100, and 125°C.

EXAMPLE 5:
.DC xval 1k 10k .5k SWEEP TEMP LIN 5 25 125
This example runs a DC analysis on the circuit, at each
temperature value. The temperatures result from a linear
temperature sweep, from 25°C to 125°C (five points), which
sweeps a resistor value named xval, from 1 k to 10 k, in
0.5 k increments.

EXAMPLE 6:
.DC DATA = datanm SWEEP par1 DEC 10 1k 100k
This example specifies a sweep of the par1 value, from 1 k
to 100 k, in increments of 10 points per decade.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DC

2-29
 EXAMPLE 7:
.DC par1 DEC 10 1k 100k SWEEP DATA = datanm
This example also requests a DC analysis, at specified
parameters in the .DATA datanm statement. It also sweeps
the par1 parameter, from 1k to 100k, in increments of 10
points per decade.

EXAMPLE 8:
.DC par1 DEC 10 1k 100k SWEEP MONTE = 30
This example invokes a DC sweep of the par1 parameter
from 1k to 100k by 10 points per decade, using 30 randomly
generated (Monte Carlo) values.

EXAMPLE 9:
* Schmitt Trigger Example
*file: bjtschmt.spbipolar schmitt trigger
.OPTION post = 2
vcc 6 0 dc 12
vin 1 0 dc 0 pwl(0,0 2.5u,12 5u,0)
cb1 2 4 .1pf
rc1 6 2 1k
rc2 6 5 1k
rb1 2 4 5.6k
rb2 4 0 4.7k
re 3 0 .47k
*
diode 0 1 dmod
q1 2 1 3 bmod 1 ic = 0,8
q2 5 4 3 bmod 1 ic = .5,0.2
*
.dc vin 0,12,.1
.model dmod d is = 1e-15 rs = 10
.model bmod npn is = 1e-15 bf = 80 tf = 1n
+ cjc = 2pf cje = 1pf rc = 50 rb = 100 vaf = 200
.plot v(1) v(5)
.graph dc model = schmittplot input = v(1)
+ output = v(5) 4.0 5.0

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DC

2-30
.model schmittplot plot xscal = 1 yscal = 1
+ xmin = .5u xmax = 1.2u
.end

DESCRIPTION:
You can use the .DC statement in DC analysis, to:

• Sweep any parameter value.

• Sweep any source value.

• Sweep temperature range.

• Perform a DC Monte Carlo (random sweep) analysis.

• Perform a data-driven sweep.

• Perform a DC circuit optimization, for a data-driven
sweep.
• Perform a DC circuit optimization, using start and stop.
• Perform a DC model characterization.
The format for the .DC statement depends on the
application that uses it.

Command
Definition
Argument

DATA = datanm Datanm is the reference name of a .DATA statement.

incr1 … Voltage, current, element, or model parameters; or

temperature increments.

MODEL Specifies the optimization reference name.

The .MODEL OPT statement uses this name in an
optimization analysis

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DC

2-31
 Command
Definition
Argument

MONTE = val val is the number of randomly-generated values, which

you can use to select parameters from a distribution.
The distribution can be Gaussian, Uniform, or Random
Limit.

np Number of points per decade or per octave, or just

number of points, based on which keyword precedes it.

OPTIMIZE Specifies the parameter reference name, used for

optimization in the .PARAM statement

RESULTS Measure name used for optimization in the .MEASURE

statement

start1 … Starting voltage, current, element, or model parameters;

or temperature values. If you use the POI (list of points)
variation type, specify a list of parameter values, instead
of start stop.

stop1 … Final voltage, current, any element, model parameter, or

temperature values.

SWEEP Keyword, to indicate that a second sweep has a different

type of variation (DEC, OCT, LIN, POI, or DATA
statement; or MONTE = val)

TEMP Keyword, to indicate a temperature sweep.

type Can be any of the following keywords:

• DEC — decade variation
• OCT — octave variation
• LIN — linear variation
• POI — list of points

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DC

2-32
Command
Definition
Argument

var1 … • Name of an independent voltage or current source,

or
• Name of any element or model parameter, or
• TEMP keyword (indicating a temperature sweep).
HSPICE supports a source value sweep, which refers to
the source name (SPICE style). However, if you select a
parameter sweep, a .DATA statement, and a
temperature sweep, then you must select a parameter
name for the source value. A later .DC statement must
refer to this name. The parameter name must not start
with V, I, or TEMP.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DC

2-33
.DCVOLT

SYNTAX:
.DCVOLT V(node1) = val1 V(node2) = val2 ...
.DCVOLT V node1 val1 <node2 val2 ...>

EXAMPLE:
.DCVOLT 11 5 4 -5 2 2.2

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .IC statement, or the .DCVOLT statement, to set
transient initial conditions in HSPICE How it initializes
depends on whether the .TRAN analysis statement includes
the UIC parameter.
If you specify the UIC parameter in the .TRAN statement,
HSPICE does not calculate the initial DC operating point, but
directly enters transient analysis. Transient analysis uses
the .IC initialization values as part of the solution, for
timepoint zero (calculating the zero timepoint applies a fixed
equivalent voltage source). The .IC statement is equivalent
to specifying the IC parameter on each element statement,
but is more convenient. You can still specify the IC
parameter, but it does not have precedence over values set
in the .IC statement.
If you do not specify the UIC parameter in the .TRAN
statement, HSPICE computes the DC operating point
solution, before the transient analysis. The node voltages
that you specify in the .IC statement are fixed, to determine
the DC operating point. Transient analysis releases the
initialized nodes, to calculate the second and later time
points.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DCVOLT

2-34
Command
Definition
Argument

val1 ... Specifies voltages. The significance of these voltages

depends on whether you specify the UIC parameter in
the .TRAN statement.

node1 ... Node numbers or names can include full paths, or circuit
numbers.

SEE ALSO:
.IC

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DCVOLT

2-35
.DEL LIB

SYNTAX:
.DEL LIB ‘<filepath>filename’ entryname
.DEL LIB libnumber entryname

EXAMPLE 1:
This example uses an .ALTER block.
FILE1: ALTER1 TEST CMOS INVERTER
.OPTION ACCT LIST
.TEMP 125
.PARAM WVAL = 15U VDD = 5
*
.OP
.DC VIN 0 5 0.1
.PLOT DC V(3) V(2)
*
VDD 1 0 VDD
VIN 2 0
*
M1 3 2 1 1 P 6U 15U
M2 3 2 0 0 N 6U W = WVAL
*
.LIB 'MOS.LIB' NORMAL
.ALTER
.DEL LIB 'MOS.LIB' NORMAL $removes LIB from memory
$PROTECTION
.PROT $protect statements
$below .PROT
.LIB 'MOS.LIB' FAST $get fast model library
.UNPROT
.ALTER
.OPTION NOMOD OPTS $suppress printing model
$parameters and print the
$option summary
.TEMP -50 0 50 $run with different
$temperatures
.PARAM WVAL = 100U VDD = 5.5 $change the parameters
VDD 1 0 5.5 $using VDD 1 0 5.5 to
$change the power supply
$VDD value doesn't
$work

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DEL LIB

2-36
 VIN 2 0 PWL 0NS 0 2NS 5 4NS 0 5NS 5
$change the input
$source
.OP VOL $node voltage table of
$operating points
.TRAN 1NS 5NS $run with transient
$also
M2 3 2 0 0 N 6U WVAL $change channel width
.MEAS SW2 TRIG V(3) VAL = 2.5 RISE = 1 TARG V(3)
+ VAL = VDD CROSS = 2 $measure output
*
.END
Example 1 calculates a DC transfer function for a CMOS
inverter.
1. First, HSPICE simulates the device, using the NORMAL
inverter model from the MOS.LIB library.
2. Using the .ALTER block and the .LIB command,
HSPICE substitutes a faster CMOS inverter, FAST, for
NORMAL.
3. HSPICE then resimulates the circuit.
4. Using the second .ALTER block, HSPICE executes DC
transfer analysis simulations at three different
temperatures, and with an n-channel width of 100 mm,
instead of 15 mm.
5. HSPICE also runs a transient analysis, in the
second .ALTER block. Use the .MEASURE statement to
measure the rise time of the inverter.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DEL LIB

2-37
 EXAMPLE 2:
This example uses an .ALTER block.
FILE2: ALTER2.SP CMOS INVERTER USING SUBCIRCUIT
.OPTION LIST ACCT
.MACRO INV 1 2 3
M1 3 2 1 1 P 6U 15U
M2 3 2 0 0 N 6U 8U
.LIB 'MOS.LIB' NORMAL
.EOM INV
XINV 1 2 3 INV
VDD 1 0 5
VIN 2 0
.DC VIN 0 5 0. 1
.PLOT V(3) V(2)
.ALTER
.DEL LIB 'MOS.LIB' NORMAL
.TF V(3) VIN $DC small-signal transfer
$function
*
.MACRO INV 1 2 3 $change data within
$subcircuit def
M1 4 2 1 1 P 100U 100U $change channel
$length,width,also
$topology
M2 4 2 0 0 N 6U 8U $change topology
R4 4 3 100 $add the new element
C3 3 0 10P $add the new element
.LIB 'MOS.LIB' SLOW $set slow model library
$.INC 'MOS2.DAT' $not allowed to be used
$inside subcircuit, allowed
$outside subcircuit
.EOM INV
.END

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DEL LIB

2-38
In this example, the .ALTER block adds a resistor and
capacitor network to the circuit. The network connects to the
output of the inverter, and HSPICE simulates a DC small-
signal transfer function.

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .DEL LIB statement to remove library data from
memory. The next time you run a simulation, the .DEL LIB
statement removes the .LIB call statement, with the same
library number and entry name, from memory. You can then
use a .LIB statement to replace the deleted library.
You can use the .DEL LIB statement with the .ALTER
statement.
Command
Definition
Argument

entryname Entry name, used in the library call statement to delete.

filename Name of a file to delete from the data file. The file path, plus
the file name, can be up to 256 characters long. You can use
any file name that is valid for the operating system that you
use. Enclose the file path and file name in single or double
quote marks.

filepath Path name of a file, if the operating system supports tree-

structured directories.

libnumber Library number, used in the library call statement to delete.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DEL LIB

2-39
.DISTO

SYNTAX:
.DISTO Rload <inter <skw2 <refpwr <spwf>>>>

EXAMPLE:
.DISTO RL 2 0.95 1.0E-3 0.75

DESCRIPTION:
The .DISTO statement computes the distortion
characteristics of the circuit in an AC small-signal,
sinusoidal, steady-state analysis.
The program computes and reports five distortion measures
at the specified load resistor. The analysis assumes that the
input uses one or two signal frequencies.
• HSPICE uses the first frequency (F1, the nominal
analysis frequency) to calculate harmonic distortion.
The .AC statement frequency-sweep sets it.

• HSPICE uses the optional second input frequency (F2)

to calculate intermodulation distortion. To set it implicitly,
specify the skw2 parameter, which is the F2/F1 ratio
HSPICE performs only one distortion analysis per
simulation. If your design contains more than one .DISTO
statement, HSPICE runs only the last statement.
The .DISTO statement calculates distortions for diodes,
BJTs (levels 1, 2, 3, and 4), and MOSFETs (Level49 and
Level53, Version 3.22).

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DISTO

2-40
.

Command
Definition
Argument

Rload The resistor element name of the output load resistor, into
which the output power feeds.

refpwr Reference power level, used to compute the distortion

products. If you omit refpwr, the default value is 1mW,
measured in decibels magnitude (dbM). The value must be
≥ 1e-10.

skw2 Ratio of the second frequency (F2) to the nominal analysis

frequency (F1), in the range 1e-3 < skw2 < 0.999. If you omit
skw2, the default value is 0.9.

spwf Amplitude of the second frequency (F2). The value must be

≥ 1e-3. Default = 1.0.

inter Interval at which HSPICE prints a distortion-measure

summary. Specifies a number of frequency points in the AC
sweep (see the np parameter in the .AC command).
• If you omit inter, or set it to zero, HSPICE does not print
a summary. To print or plot the distortion measures, use
the .PRINT or .PLOT statement.
• If you set inter to 1 or higher, HSPICE prints a summary
of the first frequency, and of each subsequent inter-
frequency increment.
To obtain a summary printout for only the first and last
frequencies, set inter equal to the total number of
increments needed, to reach fstop in the .AC statement. For
a summary printout of only the first frequency, set inter to
greater than the total number of increments required, to
reach fstop.
HSPICE prints an extensive summary from the distortion
analysis, for each frequency listed. Use the inter parameter
in the .DISTO statement to limit the amount of output
generated.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DISTO

2-41
 .DISTO Description
Value

DIM2 Intermodulation distortion, first difference. Relative

magnitude and phase of the frequency component (F1 - F2).

DIM3 Intermodulation distortion, second difference. The relative

magnitude and phase of the frequency component (2 ⋅ F1 -
F2).

HD2 Second-order harmonic distortion. Relative magnitude and

phase of the frequency component 2 ⋅ F1 (ignores F2).

HD3 Third-order harmonic distortion. Relative magnitude and

phase of the frequency component 3 ⋅ F1 (ignores F2).

SIM2 Intermodulation distortion, sum. Relative magnitude and

phase of the frequency component (F1 + F2).

SEE ALSO:
.AC

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DISTO

2-42
.DOUT

SYNTAX:
.DOUT nd VTH ( time state < time state > )
.DOUT nd VLO VHI ( time state < time state > )

EXAMPLE:
.PARAM VTH = 3.0
.DOUT node1 VTH(0.0n 0 1.0n 1
+ 2.0n X 3.0n U 4.0n Z 5.0n 0)
The .PARAM statement in this example sets the VTH
variable value to 3. The .DOUT statement, operating on the
node1 node, uses VTH as its threshold voltage.
When node1 is above 3V, it is a logic 1; otherwise, it is a
logic 0.
• At 0ns, the expected state of node1 is logic-low.
• At 1ns, the expected state is logic-high.

• At 2ns, 3ns, and 4ns, the expected state is “do not care”.
• At 5ns, the expected state is again logic low.

DESCRIPTION:
The digital output (.DOUT) statement specifies the expected
final state of an output signal, in HSPICE.
During simulation, HSPICE compares simulation results with
the expected output. If the states are different, HSPICE
reports an error.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DOUT

2-43
 Command
Definition
Argument

nd Node name.

time Absolute timepoint.

state Expected condition of the nd node at the specified time:

• 0 expect ZERO,LOW.
• 1 expect ONE,HIGH.
• else Don’t care.

VTH Single voltage threshold.

VLO Voltage of the logic-low state.

VHI Voltage of the logic-high state.

:
.DOUT State Value Description

0 expect ZERO

1 expect ONE

X, x do not care

U, u do not care

Z, z expect HIGH IMPEDANCE (don’t care)

SEE ALSO:
.GRAPH
.MEASURE
.PLOT
.PRINT
.PROBE
.STIM

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .DOUT

2-44
.EBD

SYNTAX:
.EBD ebdname
+ file = ’filename’
+ model = ’modelname’
+ component = ’compname:reference_designator’
+ {component = ’compname:reference_designator’...}

EXAMPLE:
.ebd ebd
+ file = ’test.ebd’
+ model = ’16Meg X 8 SIMM Module’
+ component = ’cmpnt:u21’
.ibis cmpnt
+ file = ’ebd.ibs’
+ component = ’SIMM’
+ hsp_ver = 2003.09 nowarn
This example corresponds to the following .ebd file:
...................
[Begin Board Description] 16Meg X 8 SIMM Module
..................
[Pin List] signal_name
J25 POWER5
[Path Description] CAS_2
Pin J25
Len = 0.5 L=8.35n C=3.34p R=0.01 /
Node u21.1
Len = 0.5 L=8.35n C=3.34p R=0.01 /
Node u22.2
Len = 0.5 L=8.35n C=3.34p R=0.01 /
Node u23.3

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .EBD

2-45
 DESCRIPTION:
The .EBD command provides the IBIS(V 3.2) EBD feature.
HSPICE and Star-Sim simulators use the .ebd file when
simulating the line connected with the u21
reference_designator. The format of node names is
ebdname_SignalName. For example, the format of a node
name called J25 is ebd_POWER5 (see Figure 2-1).

Command
Definition
Argument

compname Name of a .ibs file that describes a component.

reference_designator Reference designator that maps the component.

Figure 2-1 Circuit Connection for EBD Example

J25
Len=0.5 Len=0.5 Len=0.5

Pin1 Pin2 Pin3

U21 U22 U23

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .EBD

2-46
.ELSE

SYNTAX:
.IF (condition1)
...
<.ELSEIF (condition2) >
...
<.ELSE>
...
.ENDIF

EXAMPLE:
.IF a=b
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit1
...
.ELSEIF a=c
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit2
...
.ELSE
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit3
...
.ENDIF

DESCRIPTION:
.ELSE precedes one or more commands in a conditional
block. HSPICE executes these commands by default, if the
conditions in the preceding .IF statement, and in all of the
preceding .ELSEIF statements in the same conditional
block, are all false.

SEE ALSO:
.ELSEIF
.ENDIF
.IF

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ELSE

2-47
.ELSEIF

SYNTAX:
.IF (condition1)
...
<.ELSEIF (condition2) >
...
<.ELSE>
...
.ENDIF
.ELSE

EXAMPLE:
.IF a=b
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit1
...
.ELSEIF a=c
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit2
...
.ELSE
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit3
...
.ENDIF

DESCRIPTION:
HSPICE executes the commands that follow the first
.ELSEIF statement, only if condition1 in the preceding .IF
statement is false, and condition2 in the first .ELSEIF
statement is true.
If condition1 in the .IF statement and condition2 in the first
.ELSEIF statement are both false, then HSPICE moves on
to the next .ELSEIF statement. If this second .ELSEIF
condition is true, HSPICE executes the commands that
follow the second .ELSEIF statement, instead of the
commands after the first .ELSEIF statement.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ELSEIF

2-48
Command
Definition
Argument

condcition2 Condition that must be true, before HSPICE executes the

commands that follow the .ELSEIF statement.

SEE ALSO:
.ELSE
.ENDIF
.IF

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ELSEIF

2-49
.END

SYNTAX:
.END <comment>

EXAMPLE:
MOS OUTPUT
.OPTION NODE NOPAGE
VDS 3 0
VGS 2 0
M1 1 2 0 0 MOD1 L = 4U W = 6U AD = 10P AS = 10P
.MODEL MOD1 NMOS VTO = -2 NSUB = 1.0E15
TOX = 1000
+ UO = 550
VIDS 3 1
.DC VDS 0 10 0.5 VGS 0 5 1
.PRINT DC I(M1) V(2)
.END MOS OUTPUT
MOS CAPS
.OPTION SCALE = 1U SCALM = 1U WL ACCT
.OP
.TRAN .1 6
V1 1 0 PWL 0 -1.5V 6 4.5V
V2 2 0 1.5VOLTS
MODN1 2 1 0 0 M 10 3
.MODEL M NMOS VTO = 1 NSUB = 1E15 TOX = 1000
+ UO = 800 LEVEL = 1 CAPOP = 2
.PLOT TRAN V(1) (0,5) LX18(M1) LX19(M1) LX20(M1)
+ (0,6E-13)
.END MOS CAPS

DESCRIPTION:
An .END statement must be the last statement in the input
netlist file. The period preceding END is a required part of
the statement.
Any text that follows the .END statement is a comment, and
has no effect on that simulation.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .END

2-50
An input file that contains more than one simulation run must
include an .END statement for each simulation run. You can
concatenate several simulations into a single file.
Command
Definition
Argument

<comment> Can be any comment. Typically, the comment is the

name of the netlist file, or of the simulation run, that this
command terminates.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .END

2-51
.ENDDATA

SYNTAX:
.ENDDATA

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .ENDDATA statement to end a .DATA block in an
HSPICE input netlist.

SEE ALSO:
.DATA

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ENDDATA

2-52
.ENDIF

SYNTAX:
.IF (condition1)
...
<.ELSEIF (condition2) >
...
<.ELSE>
...
.ENDIF
.ELSE

EXAMPLE:
.IF a=b
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit1
...
.ELSEIF a=c
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit2
...
.ELSE
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit3
...
.ENDIF

DESCRIPTION:
This command ends a conditional block of commands that
begins with an .IF statement.

SEE ALSO:
.ELSE
.ELSEIF
.IF

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ENDIF

2-53
.ENDL

SYNTAX:
.ENDL

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .ENDL statement to end a .LIB statement in an
HSPICE input netlist.

SEE ALSO:
.LIB

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ENDL

2-54
.ENDS

SYNTAX:
.ENDS <SUBNAME>

EXAMPLE 1:
.ENDS mos_circuit
This example terminates a subcircuit named mos_circuit.

EXAMPLE 2:
.ENDS
If you omit the subcircuit name, as in this second example,
this statement terminates all subcircuit definitions that begin
with a .SUBCKT statement.

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .ENDS statement to terminate a .SUBCKT
statement.
This statement must be the last for any subcircuit definition
that starts with a .SUBCKT command.
You can nest subcircuit references (calls) within subcircuits,
in HSPICE.
Command
Definition
Argument

<SUBNAME> Name of the subcircuit description to terminate, that

begins with a .SUBCKT command.

SEE ALSO:
.SUBCKT

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .ENDS

2-55
.EOM

SYNTAX:
.EOM <SUBNAME>

EXAMPLE 1:
.EOM diode_circuit
This example terminates a subcircuit named
diode_circuit.

EXAMPLE 2:
.EOM
If you omit the subcircuit name, as in this second example,
this statement terminates all subcircuit definitions that begin
with a .MACRO statement.

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .EOM statement to terminate a .MACRO statement.
This statement must be the last for any subcircuit definition
that starts with a .MACRO command.
You can nest subcircuit references (calls) within subcircuits,
in HSPICE.
Command
Definition
Argument

<SUBNAME> Name of the subcircuit description to terminate, that

begins with a .SUBCKT command.

SEE ALSO:
.MACRO

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .EOM

2-56
.FFT

SYNTAX:
.FFT <output_var> <START=value> <STOP=value>
+ <NP=value> <FORMAT=keyword>
+ <WINDOW=keyword> <ALFA=value>
+ <FREQ=value> <FMIN=value> <FMAX=value>

EXAMPLE 1:
.FFT v(1)
.FFT v(1,2) np=1024 start=0.3m stop=0.5m freq=5.0k
+ window=kaiser alfa=2.5
.FFT I(rload) start=0m to=2.0m fmin=100k fmax=120k
+ format=unorm
.FFT par(‘v(1) + v(2)’) from=0.2u stop=1.2u
+ window=harris

EXAMPLE 2:
.FFT v(1) np=1024
.FFT v(2) np=1024
This example generates an .ft0 file for the FFT of v(1), and
an .ft1 file for the FFT of v(2).

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .FFT

2-57
 DESCRIPTION:
The .FFT statement uses internal time point values to
calculate the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) value, which
HSPICE uses for spectrum analysis. A DFT uses sequences
of time values to determine the frequency content of analog
signals, in circuit simulation.
You can specify only one output variable in an .FFT
command. The following is an incorrect use of the
command, because it contains two variables in one .FFT
command:
.FFT v(1) v(2) np=1024

Command
Definition
Argument

output_var Can be any valid output variable, such as voltage, current,

or power.

START Start of the output variable waveform to analyze. Defaults

to the START value in the .TRAN statement, which
defaults to 0.

FROM An alias for START in .FFT statements.

STOP End of the output variable waveform to analyze. Defaults

to the TSTOP value in the .TRAN statement.

TO An alias for STOP, in .FFT statements

NP Number of points to use in the FFT analysis. NP must be

a power of 2. If NP is not a power of 2, HSPICE
automatically adjusts it to the closest higher number that
is a power of 2. Default=1024.

FORMAT Specifies the output format:

• NORM= normalized magnitude (default)
• UNORM=unnormalized magnitude

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .FFT

2-58
Command
Definition
Argument

WINDOW Specifies the window type to use:

• RECT=simple rectangular truncation window (default).
• BART=Bartlett (triangular) window.
• HANN=Hanning window.
• HAMM=Hamming window.
• BLACK=Blackman window.
• HARRIS=Blackman-Harris window.
• GAUSS=Gaussian window.
• KAISER=Kaiser-Bessel window.

ALFA Parameter to use in GAUSS and KAISER windows, to

control the highest side-lobe level, bandwidth, and so on.
1.0 <= ALFA <= 20.0
Default=3.0

FREQ Frequency to analyze. If FREQ is non-zero, the output

lists only the harmonics of this frequency, based on FMIN
and FMAX. HSPICE also prints the THD for these
harmonics. Default=0.0 (Hz).

FMIN Minimum frequency for which HSPICE prints FFT output

into the listing file. THD calculations also use this
frequency.
T = (STOP-START)
Default=1.0/T (Hz).

FMAX Maximum frequency for which HSPICE prints FFT output

into the listing file. THD calculations also use this
frequency. Default=0.5*NP*FM IN (Hz).

SEE ALSO:
.TRAN

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .FFT

2-59
.FOUR

SYNTAX:
.FOUR freq ov1 <ov2 ov3 ...>

EXAMPLE:
.FOUR 100K V(5)

DESCRIPTION:
This statement performs a Fourier analysis, as part of the
transient analysis. You can use the .FOUR statement in
HSPICE perform the Fourier analysis over the interval
(tstop-fperiod, tstop), where:
• tstop is the final time, specified for the transient analysis.
• fperiod is a fundamental frequency period (freq
parameter).
HSPICE performs Fourier analysis on 501 points of transient
analysis data on the last 1/f time period, where f is the
fundamental Fourier frequency. HSPICE interpolates
transient data, to fit on 501 points, running from (tstop-1/f) to
tstop.
To calculate the phase, the normalized component, and the
Fourier component, HSPICE uses 10 frequency bins. The
Fourier analysis determines the DC component, and the first
nine AC components. For improved accuracy, the .FOUR
statement can use non-linear, instead of linear, interpolation.

Command
Definition
Argument

freq Fundamental frequency

ov1 … Output variables to analyze.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .FOUR

2-60
SEE ALSO:
.TRAN

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .FOUR

2-61
.FSOPTIONS

SYNTAX:
.FSOPTIONS name <ACCURACY=LOW|MEDIUM|HIGH>
+ <GRIDFACTOR=val> <PRINTDATA=YES|NO>
+ <COMPUTEG0=YES|NO> <COMPUTEGD=YES|NO>
+ <COMPUTERO=YES|NO> <COMPUTERS=YES|NO>

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .FSOPTIONS statement to set various options for
the field solver. The following rules apply to the Field Solver
when specifying options with the .FSOPTIONS statement:
• The field solver always computes the L and C matrices.

• If COMPUTERS=YES, then the field solver starts, and

calculates Lo, Ro, and Rs.

• For each accuracy mode, the field solver uses either the
pre-defined number of segments, or the number of
segments that you specified. It then multiplies this
number times the GRIDFACTOR, to obtain the final
number of segments.
Because a wide range of applications are available, the pre-
defined accuracy level might not be accurate enough for
some applications. If you need a higher accuracy than the
value that the HIGH option sets, then increase either the
GRIDFACTOR value, or the N/NH/NW values, to increase
the mesh density.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .FSOPTIONS

2-62
Command
Definition
Argument

name Option name.

ACCURACY Sets the solver accuracy to one of the following:

• LOW
• MEDIUM
• HIGH

GRIDFACTOR Multiplication factor (integer) to determine the final

number of segments used to define the shape.
If you set COMPUTERS=yes, the field solver does not
use this parameter to compute Ro and Rs values.

PRINTDATA The solver prints output matrices.

COMPUTEGO The solver computes the static conductance matrix.

COMPUTEGD The solver computes the dielectric loss matrix.

COMPUTERO The solver computes the DC resistance matrix.

COMPUTERS The solver computes the skin-effect resistance matrix.

This parameter uses the filament method solver to
compute Ro and Rs.

SEE ALSO:
.LAYERSTACK
.MATERIAL
.SHAPE

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .FSOPTIONS

2-63
.GLOBAL

SYNTAX:
.GLOBAL node1 node2 node3 ...

EXAMPLE:
This example shows global definitions for VDD and
input_sig nodes.
.GLOBAL VDD input_sig

DESCRIPTION:
The .GLOBAL statement globally assigns a node name, in
HSPICE. This means that all references to a global node
name, used at any level of the hierarchy in the circuit,
connect to the same node.
The most common use of a .GLOBAL statement is if your
netlist file includes subcircuits. This statement assigns a
common node name to subcircuit nodes. Another common
use of .GLOBAL statements is to assign power supply
connections of all subcircuits. For example, .GLOBAL VCC
connects all subcircuits with the internal node name VCC.
Ordinarily, in a subcircuit, the node name consists of the
circuit number, concatenated to the node name. When you
use a .GLOBAL statement, HSPICE does not concatenate
the node name with the circuit number, and assigns only the
global name. You can then exclude the power node name in
the subcircuit or macro call.
Command
Definition
Argument

node1 Name of a global nodes, such as supply and clock

node2 names; overrides local subcircuit definitions.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .GLOBAL

2-64
.GRAPH

SYNTAX:
.GRAPH antype <MODEL = mname> <unam1 = > ov1,
+ <unam2 = >ov2 ... <unamn = >ovn (plo,phi)

EXAMPLE:
.GRAPH DC cgb = lx18(m1) cgd = lx19(m1)
+ cgs = lx20(m1)
.GRAPH DC MODEL = plotbjt
+ model_ib = i2(q1) meas_ib = par(ib)
+ model_ic = i1(q1) meas_ic = par(ic)
+ model_beta = par('i1(q1)/i2(q1)')
+ meas_beta = par('par(ic)/par(ib)')(1e-10,1e-1)
.MODEL plotbjt PLOT MONO = 1 YSCAL = 2 XSCAL = 2
+ XMIN = 1e-8 XMAX = 1e-1

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .GRAPH statement when you need high-resolution
plots of HSPICE simulation results. You cannot
use .GRAPH statements in the PC version of HSPICE.
Each .GRAPH statement creates a new .gr# file, where #
ranges first from 0 to 9, and then from a to z. You can create
up to 10000 graph files.
You can include wildcards in .GRAPH statements.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .GRAPH

2-65
 Command
Definition
Argument
antype Type of analysis for the specified plots (outputs). Analysis
types are: DC, AC, TRAN, NOISE, or DISTO.
mname Plot model name, referenced in the .GRAPH statement.
Use .GRAPH and its plot name to create high-resolution
plots directly from HSPICE.
unam1… You can define output names, which correspond to the ov1
ov2 … output variables (unam1 unam2 ...), and use them as
labels, instead of output variables, for a high resolution
graphic output.
ov1 … Output variables to print. Can be voltage, current, or element
template variables, from a different type of analysis. You can
also use algebraic expressions as output variables, but you
must define them inside the PAR( ) statement.
plo, phi Lower and upper plot limits. Set the plot limits only at the end
of the .GRAPH statement.

SEE ALSO:
.DOUT
.MEASURE
.PLOT
.PRINT
.PROBE
.STIM

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .GRAPH

2-66
.IBIS

SYNTAX:
.IBIS cname keyword_1 = value_1 ...
+ [keyword_M= value_M]

DESCRIPTION:
This is the general syntax for the .IBIS command when used
with a component. The optional keywords are in square
brackets.
Command
Definition
Argument

cname Instance name of this ibis command

keyword_i= Assigns the value_i value, to the keyword_i keyword.

value_i Optional keywords are in the square brackets.

SEE ALSO:
.EBD
.PKG

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .IBIS

2-67
.IC

SYNTAX:
.IC V(node1) = val1 V(node2) = val2 ...

EXAMPLE:
.IC V(11) = 5 V(4) = -5 V(2) = 2.2

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .IC statement, or the .DCVOLT statement, to set
transient initial conditions in HSPICE How it initializes
depends on whether the .TRAN analysis statement includes
the UIC parameter.
If you specify the UIC parameter in the .TRAN statement,
HSPICE does not calculate the initial DC operating point, but
directly enters transient analysis. Transient analysis uses
the .IC initialization values as part of the solution, for
timepoint zero (calculating the zero timepoint applies a fixed
equivalent voltage source). The .IC statement is equivalent
to specifying the IC parameter on each element statement,
but is more convenient. You can still specify the IC
parameter, but it does not have precedence over values set
in the .IC statement.
If you do not specify the UIC parameter in the .TRAN
statement, HSPICE computes the DC operating point
solution, before the transient analysis. The node voltages
that you specify in the .IC statement are fixed, to determine
the DC operating point. Transient analysis releases the
initialized nodes, to calculate the second and later time
points.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .IC

2-68
Command
Definition
Argument

val1 ... Specifies voltages. The significance of these voltages

depends on whether you specify the UIC parameter in
the .TRAN statement.

node1 ... Node numbers or names can include full paths, or circuit
numbers.

SEE ALSO:
.DCVOLT
.TRAN

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .IC

2-69
.IF

SYNTAX:
.IF (condition1)
...
<.ELSEIF (condition2) >
...
<.ELSE>
...
.ENDIF
.ELSE

EXAMPLE:
.IF a=b
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit1
...
.ELSEIF a=c
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit2
...
.ELSE
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit3
...
.ENDIF

DESCRIPTION:
.IF marks the start of a conditional block in a netlist. HSPICE
executes the commands that follow an .IF statement, only if
condition1 is true. If condition1 is false, HSPICE moves on to
the first .ELSEIF statement. If this .ELSEIF condition is true,
HSPICE executes the commands that follow the .ELSEIF
statement, instead of the commands after the .IF statement.
Command
Definition
Argument

condcition1 Condition that must be true, before HSPICE executes the

commands that follow the .IF statement.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .IF

2-70
SEE ALSO:
.ELSE
.ELSEIF
.ENDIF

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .IF

2-71
.INCLUDE

SYNTAX:
.INCLUDE ‘<filepath> filename’

EXAMPLE:
.INCLUDE /myhome/subcircuits/diode_circuit

DESCRIPTION:
You can include a netlist as a subcircuit in one or more other
netlists. To include another netlist in the current netlist, use
the .INCLUDE statement.
Command
Definition
Argument

filepath Path name of a file, for computer operating systems that

support tree-structured directories.
A .INC file can contain nested .INC calls to itself, or to
another .INC file. If you use a relative path in a nested .INC
call, the path starts from the directory of the parent .INC file,
not from the work directory. If the path starts from the work
directory, HSPICE can also find the .INC file, but prints a
warning.

filename Name of a file to include in the data file. The file path, plus
the file name, can be up to 1024 characters long. You can
use any valid file name for the computer’s operating system.
You must enclose the file path and name in single or double
quotation marks.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .INCLUDE

2-72
.LAYERSTACK

SYNTAX:
.LAYERSTACK sname <BACKGROUND=mname>
+ <LAYER=(mname,thickness) ...>

DESCRIPTION:
A layer stack defines a stack of dielectric or metal layers.
You must associate each transmission line system with one,
and only one, layer stack. However, you can associate a
single-layer stack with many transmission line systems.
In the layer stack:
• Layers are listed from bottom to top.

• Metal layers (ground planes) are located only at the

bottom, only at the top, or both at the top and bottom.
• Layers are stacked in the y-direction, and the bottom of a
layer stack is at y=0.
• All conductors must be located above y=0.

• Background material must be dielectric.

The following limiting cases apply to the .LAYERSTACK
command:
• Free space without ground:
.LAYERSTACK mystack

• Free space with a (bottom) ground plane:

.LAYERSTACK halfSpace PEC 0.1mm

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LAYERSTACK

2-73
 Command
Definition
Argument

sname Layer stack name.

mname Material name.

BACKGROUND Background dielectric material name. By default, the

Field Solver assumes AIR for the background.

thickness Layer thickness.

SEE ALSO:
.FSOPTIONS
.MATERIAL
.SHAPE

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LAYERSTACK

2-74
.LIB

SYNTAX:
Use the following syntax for library calls:
.LIB ‘<filepath> filename’ entryname
Use the following syntax to define library files:
.LIB entryname1
. $ ANY VALID SET OF HSPICE STATEMENTS
.ENDL entryname1
.LIB entryname2
.
. $ ANY VALID SET OF HSPICE STATEMENTS
.ENDL entryname2
.LIB entryname3
.
. $ ANY VALID ET OF HSPICE STATEMENTS
.ENDL entryname3

EXAMPLE 1:
* Library call
.LIB 'MODELS' cmos1

EXAMPLE 2:
.LIB MOS7
$ Any valid set of HSPICE commands
.
.
.
.ENDL MOS7

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LIB

2-75
 EXAMPLE 3:
The following are an illegal example and a legal example of
nested .LIB statements for the file3 library.
Illegal:
.LIB MOS7
...
.LIB 'file3' MOS7 $ This call is illegal in MOS7
library
...
...
.ENDL
Legal:
.LIB MOS7
...
.LIB 'file1' MOS8
.LIB 'file2' MOS9
.LIB CTT $ file2 is already open for the CTT
$ entry point
.ENDL

EXAMPLE 4:
.LIB TT
$TYPICAL P-CHANNEL AND N-CHANNEL CMOS LIBRARY
$ PROCESS: 1.0U CMOS, FAB7
$ following distributions are 3 sigma ABSOLUTE
GAUSSIAN
.PARAM TOX = AGAUSS(200,20,3)$ 200 angstrom +/- 20a
+ XL = AGAUSS(0.1u,0.13u,3)$ polysilicon CD
+ DELVTON = AGAUSS(0.0,.2V,3)$ n-ch threshold
change
+ DELVTOP = AGAUSS(0.0,.15V,3)
$ p-ch threshold change
.INC ‘/usr/meta/lib/cmos1_mod.dat’
$ model include file
.ENDL TT

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LIB

2-76
.LIB FF
$HIGH GAIN P-CH AND N-CH CMOS LIBRARY 3SIGMA VALUES
.PARAM TOX = 220 XL = -0.03 DELVTON = -.2V
+ DELVTOP = -0.15V
.INC ‘/usr/meta/lib/cmos1_mod.dat’
$ model include file
.ENDL FF
This example is a .LIB of model skew parameters, and
features both worst-case and statistical distribution data.
The statistical distribution median value is the default, for all
non-Monte Carlo analysis. The model is in the /usr/meta/lib/
cmos1_mod.dat include file.
.MODEL NCH NMOS LEVEL = 2 XL = XL TOX = TOX
+ DELVTO = DELVTON .....
.MODEL PCH PMOS LEVEL = 2 XL = XL TOX = TOX
+ DELVTO = DELVTOP .....
The model keyword (left side) equates to the skew
parameter (right side). A model keyword can be the same as
a skew parameter.

DESCRIPTION:
To create and read from libraries of commonly-used
commands, device models, subcircuit analysis, and
statements (library calls) in library files, use the .LIB call
statement. As HSPICE encounters each .LIB call name in
the main data file, it reads the corresponding entry from the
designated library file, until it finds an .ENDL statement.
You can also place a .LIB call statement in an .ALTER
block.
To build libraries (library file definition), use the .LIB
statement in a library file. For each macro in a library, use a
library definition statement (.LIB entryname) and an .ENDL
statement.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LIB

2-77
 The .LIB statement begins the library macro, and the .ENDL
statement ends the library macro. The text after a library file
entry name must consist of HSPICE statements.
Library calls can call other libraries (nested library calls), if
they are different files. You can nest library calls to any
depth. Use nesting with the .ALTER statement, to create a
sequence of model runs. Each run can consist of similar
components, using different model parameters, without
duplicating the entire input file.
The simulator uses the .LIB statement and the .INCLUDE
statement, to access the models and skew parameters. The
library contains parameters that modify .MODEL
statements.
Command
Definition
Argument

filepath Path to a file. Used where a computer supports tree-

structured directories. When the LIB file (or alias) is in the
same directory where you run HSPICE, you do not need to
specify a directory path; the netlist runs on any machine. Use
the “../” syntax in the filepath, to designate the parent
directory of the current directory.

entryname Entry name, for the section of the library file to include. The
first character of an entryname cannot be an integer.

filename Name of a file to include in the data file. The combination of

filepath plus filename can be up to 256 characters long,
structured as any filename that is valid for the computer’s
operating system. Enclose the file path and file name in single
or double quotation marks. Use the “../” syntax in the
filename, to designate the parent directory of the current
directory.

SEE ALSO:
.ENDL

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LIB

2-78
.LIN

SYNTAX:
.LIN <sparcalc = [1|0] <modelname = ...>>
+ <filename = ...> <format=[selem|citi|touchstone]>
+ <noisecalc = [1|0] <gdcalc = [1|0]>

EXAMPLE:
.LIN sparcalc=1 modelname=my_custom_model
filename=mydesign format=touchstone noisecalc=1
gdcalc=1
This example extracts noise and linear transfer parameters
for a general multi-port network, performs 2-port noise
analysis, and performs group delay analysis, for a model
named my_custom_model. The output is in TOUCHSTONE
format, in the mydesign output file.
DESCRIPTION:
The .LIN command extracts noise and linear transfer
parameters for a general multi-port network.
When used with the .AC command, .LIN makes available a
broad set of linear port-wise measurements:
• Multi-port scattering [S] parameters.
• Noise parameters.
• Stability factors.
• Gain factors.

• Matching coefficients.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LIN

2-79
 The .LIN command computes the S (scattering), Y
(admittance), and Z (impedance) parameters directly, based
on the location of the port (P) elements in your circuit, and
the specified values for their reference impedances. For
example, the following port element specifications identify
50-ohm reference impedances, at the input and output.

Command
Definition
Argument

sparcalc If 1, extract S parameters (default).

modelname Model name listed in the .MODEL statement, in the .sc#

model output file.

filename Output file name (default=netlist name).

format Output file format:

• selem is for S element .sc# format, which you can include
in the netlist.
• citi is CITI file format.
• touchstone is TOUCHSTONE file format.

noisecalc If 1, extract noise parameters (perform 2-port noise analysis).

Default=0.

gdcalc If 1, extract group delay (perform group delay analysis).

Default=0.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LIN

2-80
.LOAD

SYNTAX:
.LOAD <FILE = load_file> <RUN = PREVIOUS | CUR-
RENT>

EXAMPLE 1:
.TITLE
.SAVE FILE=design.ic
.LOAD FILE=design.ic0
$load--design.ic0 save--design.ic0
.alter
... $load--none save--design.ic1
.alter
... $load--none save--design.ic2
.end
This example loads a file name design.ic0, which you
previously saved using a .SAVE command.

EXAMPLE 2:
.TITLE
.SAVE FILE=design.ic
.LOAD FILE=design.ic RUN=PREVIOUS
$load--none save--design.ic0
.alter
... $load--design.ic0 save--design.ic1
.alter
... $load--design.ic1 save--design.ic2
.end

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LOAD

2-81
 EXAMPLE 3:
.TITLE
.SAVE FILE=design.ic
.LOAD FILE=design.ic RUN=CURRENT
$load--design.ic0 save--design.ic0
.alter
... $load--design.ic1 save--design.ic1
.alter
... $load--design.ic2 save--design.ic2
.end

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .LOAD statement to input the contents of a file, that
you stored using the .SAVE statement in HSPICE.
Files stored with the .SAVE statement contain operating
point information, for the point in the analysis at which you
executed .SAVE.
Do not use the .LOAD command for concatenated netlist
files.

Command
Definition
Argument

load_file Name of the file, in which .SAVE saved an operating

point, for the circuit under simulation.The format of the file
name is <design>.ic#. Default is <design>.ic0, where
design is the root name of the design.

RUN= Used only outside of .ALTER statements, in a netlist that

contains .ALTER statements. The format of file name is
<design>.ic.

PREVIOUS Each .ALTER run uses the saved operating point from the
previous .ALTER run in the same simulation.

CURRENT Each .ALTER run uses the saved operating point from the
current .ALTER run in the last simulation.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LOAD

2-82
SEE ALSO:
.SAVE

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .LOAD

2-83
.MACRO

SYNTAX:
.MACRO subnam n1 <n2 n3 …> <parnam = val>
.EOM

EXAMPLE 1:
*FILE SUB2.SP TEST OF SUBCIRCUITS
.OPTION LIST ACCT
V1 1 0 1
.PARAM P5 = 5 P2 = 10
.SUBCKT SUB1 1 2 P4 = 4
R1 1 0 P4
R2 2 0 P5
X1 1 2 SUB2 P6 = 7
X2 1 2 SUB2
.ENDS
*
.MACRO SUB2 1 2 P6 = 11
R1 1 2 P6
R2 2 0 P2
.EOM
X1 1 2 SUB1 P4 = 6
X2 3 4 SUB1 P6 = 15
X3 3 4 SUB2
*
.MODEL DA D CJA = CAJA CJP = CAJP VRB = -20
IS = 7.62E-18
+ PHI = .5 EXA = .5 EXP = .33
.PARAM CAJA = 2.535E-16 CAJP = 2.53E-16
.END
The preceding example defines two subcircuits: SUB1 and
SUB2. These are resistor divider networks, whose
resistance values are parameters (variables). The X1, X2,
and X3 statements call these subcircuits. Because the
resistor values are different in each call, these three calls
produce different subcircuits.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MACRO

2-84
EXAMPLE 2:
.SUBCKT Inv a y Strength = 3
Mp1 <MosPinList> pMosMod L = 1.2u W = ’Strength * 2u’
Mn1 <MosPinList> nMosMod L = 1.2u W = ’Strength * 1u’
.ENDS
...
xInv0 a y0 Inv$ Default devices: p device = 6u,
$ n device = 3u
xInv1 a y1 Inv Strength = 5$ p device = 10u, n
device = 5u
xInv2 a y2 Inv Strength = 1$ p device = 2u, n
device = 1u
...
This example implements an inverter that uses a Strength
parameter. By default, the inverter can drive three devices.
Enter a new value for the Strength parameter in the element
line, to select larger or smaller inverters for the application.

DESCRIPTION:
You can create a subcircuit description for a commonly-used
circuit, and include one or more references to the subcircuit
in your netlist.
To define a subcircuit in your netlist, use the .MACRO
statement. Use the .EOM statement to terminate a .MACRO
statement.

Command
Definition
Argument

subnam Specifies a reference name for the subcircuit model call.

n1 … Node numbers for external reference; cannot be the

ground node (zero). Any element nodes that are in the
subcircuit, but are not in this list, are strictly local, with
three exceptions:
• Ground node (zero).
• Nodes assigned using BULK = node in MOSFET or
BJT models.
• Nodes assigned using the .GLOBAL statement.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MACRO

2-85
 Command
Definition
Argument

parnam A parameter name set to a value. Use only in the

subcircuit. To override this value, assign it in the subcircuit
call, or set a value in a .PARAM statement.

SubDefaultsList <SubParam1>=<Expression>
[<SubParam2>=<Expression>...]

SEE ALSO:
.ENDS
.EOM

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MACRO

2-86
.MALIAS

SYNTAX:
.MALIAS model_name=alias_name1 <alias_name2 ...>

• model_name is the model name defined in the .model

card.
• alias_name1... is the alias that an instance (element) of
the model references.
EXAMPLE:
*file: test malias statement
.OPTION acct tnom=50 list gmin=1e-14 post
.temp 0.0 25
.tran .1 2
vdd 2 0 pwl 0 -1 1 1
d1 2 1 zend dtemp=25
d2 1 0 zen dtemp=25
* malias statements
.malias zendef = zen zend
* model definition
.model zendef d (vj=.8 is=1e-16 ibv=1e-9 bv=6.0
rs=10
+ tt=0.11n n=1.0 eg=1.11 m=.5 cjo=1pf tref=50)
.end

• zendef is a diode model

• zen and zend are its aliases.

• The zendef model points to both the zen and zend
aliases.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MALIAS

2-87
 DESCRIPTION:
You can use the .MALIAS statement to assign an alias
(another name) to a diode, BJT, JFET, or MOSFET model
that you defined in a .MODEL statement.
.MALIAS differs from .ALIAS in two ways:

• The alias in an .ALIAS statement is defined in a .MODEL

card, but the model card does not define the alias in
a .MALIAS statement.

• The .ALIAS command works only if you include .ALTER

in the netlist. You can use .MALIAS without .ALTER.

You can us .MALIAS to alias to a model name that you

defined in a .MODEL statement, or to alias to a subcircuit
name that you defined in a .SUBCKT statement. The syntax
for .MALIAS is the same in either usage.
SEE ALSO:
.ALIAS

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MALIAS

2-88
.MATERIAL

SYNTAX:
.MATERIAL mname METAL|DIELECTRIC <ER=val>
+ <UR=val> <CONDUCTIVITY=val>
+ <LOSSTANGENT=val>

DESCRIPTION:
The field solver assigns the following default values for
metal:

• CONDUCTIVITY = -1 (perfect conductor)

• ER = 1
• UR = 1

PEC is a pre-defined metal name. You cannot redefine its

default values.
The field solver assigns the following default values for
dielectrics:
• CONDUCTIVITY = 0 (lossless dielectric)
• LOSSTANGENT = 0 (lossless dielectric)
• ER = 1

• UR = 1

AIR is a pre-defined dielectric name. You cannot redefine its

default values.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MATERIAL

2-89
 Because the field solver does not currently support magnetic
materials, it ignores UR values.
Command
Definition
Argument

mname Material name.

METAL|DIELECTRIC Material type: METAL or DIELECTRIC.

ER Dielectric constant (relative permittivity).

UR Relative permeability.

CONDUCTIVITY Static field conductivity of conductor or lossy

dielectric (S/m).

LOSSTANGENT
Alternating field loss tangent of dielectric (tan δ ).

SEE ALSO:
.LAYERSTACK

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MATERIAL

2-90
.MEASURE

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .MEASURE statement to modify information, and to
define the results of successive HSPICE simulations.
The .MEASURE statement prints user-defined electrical
specifications of a circuit. Optimization uses .MEASURE
statements extensively. The specifications include:

• propagation
• delay
• rise time
• fall time

• peak-to-peak voltage
• minimum and maximum voltage over a specified period
• other user-defined variables

You can also use .MEASURE with either the error function
or GOAL parameter, to optimize circuit component values,
and to curve-fit measured data to model parameters.
The .MEASURE statement can use several different
formats, depending on the application. You can use it for
either DC sweep, AC, or transient analysis.

SEE ALSO:
.DOUT
.GRAPH
.PLOT
.PRINT
.PROBE
.STIM

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE

2-91
.MEASURE (Rise, Fall, and Delay Measurements)

SYNTAX:
.MEASURE <DC|AC|TRAN> result TRIG … TARG …
+ <GOAL = val> <MINVAL = val> <WEIGHT = val>

EXAMPLE 1:
* Example of rise/fall/delay measurement
.MEASURE TRAN tdlay TRIG V(1) VAL = 2.5 TD = 10n
+ RISE = 2 TARG V(2) VAL = 2.5 FALL = 2
This example measures the propagation delay between
nodes 1 and 2, for a transient analysis. HSPICE measures
the delay from the second rising edge of the voltage at node
1, to the second falling edge of node 2. The measurement
begins when the second rising voltage at node 1 is 2.5 V,
and ends when the second falling voltage at node 2 is 2.5 V.
The TD = 10n parameter counts the crossings, after 10 ns
has elapsed. HSPICE prints results as tdlay = <value>.

EXAMPLE 2:
.MEASURE TRAN riset TRIG I(Q1) VAL = 0.5m RISE = 3
+ TARG I(Q1) VAL = 4.5m RISE = 3
* Rise/fall/delay measure with TRIG and TARG specs
.MEASURE pwidth TRIG AT = 10n TARG V(IN) VAL = 2.5
+ CROSS = 3
In the last example, TRIG. AT = 10n starts measuring time at
t = 10 ns, in the transient analysis. The TARG parameters
end time measurement, when V(IN) = 2.5 V, on the third
crossing. pwidth is the printed output variable.
If you use the .TRAN statement with a .MEASURE
statement, do not use a non-zero START time in .TRAN
statement, or the .MEASURE results might be incorrect.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Rise, Fall, and Delay Measurements)

2-92
DESCRIPTION:
Use the Rise, Fall, and Delay form of the .MEASURE
statement to measure independent-variable (time,
frequency, or any parameter or temperature) differential
measurements such as rise time, fall time, slew rate, or any
measurement that requires determining independent
variable values. This format specifies TRIG and TARG
substatements. These two statements specify the beginning
and end of a voltage or current amplitude measurement.

Command
Definition
Argument

MEASURE Specifies measurements. You can abbreviate to

MEAS.

result Name associated with the measured value, in the

HSPICE output. This example measures the
independent variable, beginning at the trigger, and
ending at the target:
• Transient analysis measures time.
• AC analysis measures frequency.
• DC analysis measures the DC sweep variable.
If simulation reaches the target before the trigger
activates, the resulting value is negative.
Do not use DC, TRAN, or AC as the result name.

TRIG… Identifies the beginning of trigger specifications.

TRIG trig_var VAL = trig_val <TD = time_delay>
+ <CROSS = c> <RISE = r> <FALL = f>
TRIG_SPEC and TARG_SPEC can also use the
syntax:
TRIG AT = time

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Rise, Fall, and Delay Measurements)

2-93
 Command
Definition
Argument

TARG … Identifies the beginning of target specifications.You

can use the LAST keyword in TARG_SPEC to indicate
the last event.
TARG targ_var VAL = targ_val <TD = time_delay>
+ <CROSS = c | LAST> <RISE = r | LAST>
+ <FALL = f | LAST>

<DC|AC|TRAN> Specifies the analysis type of the measurement. If you

omit this parameter, HSPICE uses the last analysis
mode that you requested.

GOAL Specifies the desired measure value in ERR

calculation for optimization. To calculate the error, the
simulation uses the equation:
ERRfun = ( GOAL – result ) ⁄ GOAL .

MINVAL If the absolute value of GOAL is less than MINVAL, the

MINVAL replaces the GOAL value, in the denominator
of the ERRfun expression. Used only in ERR
calculation for optimization. Default = 1.0e-12.

WEIGHT Multiplies the calculated error by the weight value.

Used only in ERR calculation for optimization.
Default = 1.0.

TRIG/TARG
Definition
Parameter

TRIG Indicates the beginning of the trigger specification.

trig_val Value of trig_var, which increments the counter for

crossings, rises, or falls, by one.

trig_var Specifies the name of the output variable, that

determines the logical beginning of a measurement. If
HSPICE reaches the target before the trigger
activates, .MEASURE reports a negative value.

TARG Indicates the beginning of the target signal

specification.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Rise, Fall, and Delay Measurements)

2-94
TRIG/TARG
Definition
Parameter

targ_val Specifies the value of the targ_var, which increments

the counter for crossings, rises, or falls, by one.

targ_var Name of the output variable, at which HSPICE

determines the propagation delay with respect to the
trig_var.

time_delay Amount of simulation time that must elapse, before

HSPICE enables the measurement. Simulation counts
the number of crossings, rises, or falls, only after the
time_delay value. Default trigger delay is zero.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Rise, Fall, and Delay Measurements)

2-95
.MEASURE (Average, RMS, and Peak Measurements)

SYNTAX:
.MEASURE < TRAN > out_var func var
+ FROM = start TO = end

EXAMPLE 1:
.MEAS TRAN RMSVAL RMS V(OUT) FROM = 0NS TO = 10NS
In this example, the .MEASURE statement calculates the
RMS voltage of the OUT node, from 0ns to 10ns. It then
labels the result RMSVAL.

EXAMPLE 2:
.MEAS MAXCUR MAX I(VDD) FROM = 10NS TO = 200NS
In this example, the .MEASURE statement finds the
maximum current of the VDD voltage supply, between 10ns
and 200ns in the simulation. The result is called MAXCUR.

EXAMPLE 3:
.MEAS P2P PP PAR(‘V(OUT)/V(IN)’)
+ FROM = 0NS TO = 200NS
In this example, the .MEASURE statement uses the ratio of
V(OUT) and V(IN) to find the peak-to-peak value, in the
interval of 0ns to 200ns.
DESCRIPTION:
This .MEASURE statement reports the average, RMS, or
peak value of the specified output variable.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Average, RMS, and Peak Measurements)

2-96
 Command
Definition
Argument

varname User-defined variable name for the measurement.

func One of the following keywords:

• AVG: Average area under var, divided by the
period of interest.
• MAX: Maximum value of var over the specified
interval.
• MIN: Minimum value of var over the specified
interval.
• PP: Peak-to-peak: reports the maximum value,
minus the minimum of var over the specified
interval.
• RMS: Root mean squared: calculates the square
root of the area under the var2 curve, divided by the
period of interest.
• INTEG: Integral of var over the specified period.

out_var Name of the output variable, which can be either the

var node voltage or the branch current of the circuit. You
can also use an expression, consisting of the node
voltages or the branch current.

start Starting time of the measurement period.

end Ending time of the measurement period.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Average, RMS, and Peak Measurements)

2-97
.MEASURE (FIND and WHEN)

SYNTAX:
.MEASURE <DC|TRAN| AC> result
+ WHEN out_var = val <TD = val>
+ < RISE = r | LAST > < FALL = f | LAST >
+ < CROSS = c | LAST >
+ <GOAL = val> <MINVAL = val> <WEIGHT = val>
.MEASURE <DC|TRAN|AC> result
+ WHEN out_var1 = out_var2
+ < TD = val > < RISE = r | LAST >
+ < FALL = f | LAST >
+ < CROSS = c| LAST > <GOAL = val>
+ <MINVAL = val> <WEIGHT = val>
.MEASURE <DC|TRAN|AC> result FIND out_var1
+ WHEN out_var2 = val < TD = val >
+ < RISE = r | LAST >
+ < FALL = f | LAST > < CROSS = c| LAST >
+ <GOAL = val> <MINVAL = val> <WEIGHT = val>
.MEASURE <DC|TRAN|AC> result FIND out_var1
+ WHEN out_var2 = out_var3 <TD = val >
+ < RISE = r | LAST > < FALL = f | LAST >
+ <CROSS = c | LAST> <GOAL = val>
+ <MINVAL = val> <WEIGHT = val>
.MEASURE <DC|TRAN|AC> result FIND out_var1
+ AT = val <GOAL = val> <MINVAL = val>
+ <WEIGHT = val>

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (FIND and WHEN)

2-98
EXAMPLE:
* MEASURE statement using FIND/WHEN
.MEAS TRAN TRT FIND PAR(‘V(3)-V(4)’)
+ WHEN V(1)=PAR(‘V(2)/2’) RISE = LAST
.MEAS STIME WHEN V(4) = 2.5 CROSS = 3
In this example, the first measurement, TRT, calculates the
difference between V(3) and V(4), when V(1) is half the
voltage of V(2) at the last rise event.
The second measurement, STIME, finds the time when V(4)
is 2.5V at the third rise-fall event. A CROSS event is a rising
or falling edge.

DESCRIPTION:
The FIND and WHEN functions of the .MEASURE
statement specify to measure:
• Any independent variables (time, frequency, parameter).
• Any dependent variables (voltage or current, for
example).
• Derivative of a dependent variable, if a specific event
occurs.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (FIND and WHEN)

2-99
 Command
Definition
Argument

CROSS = c Numbers indicate which CROSS, FALL, or RISE event

RISE = r to measure. For example:
FALL = f .meas tran tdlay trig v(1) val=1.5 td=10n
+ rise=2 targ v(2) val=1.5 fall=2

In the above example, rise=2 specifies to measure the

v(1) voltage, only on the first two rising edges of the
waveform. The value of these first two rising edges is
1. However, trig v(1) val=1.5 indicates to trigger when
the voltage on the rising edge voltage is 1.5, which
never occurs on these first two rising edges. So the
v(1) voltage measurement never finds a trigger.

• RISE = r, the WHEN condition is met, and

measurement occurs after the designated signal
has risen r rise times.
• FALL = f, measurement occurs when the
designated signal has fallen f fall times.
A crossing is either a rise or a fall, so for CROSS = c,
measurement occurs when the designated signal has
achieved a total of c crossing times, as a result of
either rising or falling.
For TARG, the LAST keyword specifies the last event.

LAST HSPICE measures when the last CROSS, FALL, or

RISE event occurs.
• CROSS = LAST, measurement occurs the last time
the WHEN condition is true, for a rising or falling
signal.
• FALL = LAST, measurement occurs the last time
the WHEN condition is true, for a falling signal.
• RISE = LAST, measurement occurs the last time
the WHEN condition is true, for a rising signal.
LAST is a reserved word; you cannot use it as a
parameter name in the above .MEASURE statements.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (FIND and WHEN)

2-100
Command
Definition
Argument

AT = val Special case for trigger specification. val is:

• Time for TRAN analysis.
• Frequency for AC analysis.
• Parameter for DC analysis.
The trigger determines where measurement starts.

<DC|AC|TRAN> Analysis type for the measurement. If you omit this

parameter, HSPICE assumes the last analysis type
that you requested.

FIND Selects the FIND function.

GOAL Desired .MEASURE value. Optimization uses this

value in ERR calculation. The following equation
calculates the error:
ERRfun = ( GOAL – result ) ⁄ GOAL .

LAST Starts measurement at the last CROSS, FALL, or RISE

event.
• For CROSS = LAST, measurement starts the last
time the WHEN condition is true, for either a rising
or falling signal.
• For FALL = LAST, measurement starts the last time
the WHEN condition is true, for a falling signal.
• For RISE = LAST, measurement starts the last time
the WHEN condition is true for a rising signal.
LAST is a reserved word. Do not use it as a parameter
name in these .MEASURE statements.

MINVAL If the absolute value of GOAL is less than MINVAL,

then MINVAL replaces the GOAL value in the
denominator of the ERRfun expression. Used only in
ERR calculation for optimization. Default = 1.0e-12.

out_var(1,2,3) These variables establish conditions that start a

measurement.

result Name of a measured value, in the HSPICE output.

TD Time at which measurement starts.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (FIND and WHEN)

2-101
 Command
Definition
Argument

WEIGHT Multiplies the calculated error by the weight value.

Used only in ERR calculation for optimization.
Default = 1.0.

WHEN Selects the WHEN function.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (FIND and WHEN)

2-102
.MEASURE (Equation Evaluation/ Arithmetic Expression)

SYNTAX:
.MEASURE <DC|TRAN|AC> result PARAM = ’equation’
+ <GOAL = val> <MINVAL = val>
.MEASURE < TRAN > varname PARAM = “expression”

EXAMPLE:
.MEAS TRAN V3MAX MAX V(3) FROM 0NS TO 100NS
.MEAS TRAN V2MIN MIN V(2) FROM 0NS TO 100NS
.MEAS VARG PARAM = ‘(V2MIN + V3MAX)/2’
The first two measurements, V3MAX and V2MIN, set up the
variables for the third measurement statement.

• V3MAX is the maximum voltage of V(3) between 0ns and

100ns of the simulation.
• V2MIN is the minimum voltage of V(2) during that same
interval.

• VARG is the mathematical average of the V3MAX and

V2MIN measurements.
DESCRIPTION:
Use the Equation Evaluation form of the .MEASURE
statement to evaluate an equation, that is a function of the
results of previous .MEASURE statements. The equation
must not be a function of node voltages or branch currents.
The expression option is an arithmetic expression, that uses
results from other prior .MEASURE statements.
Expressions used in arithmetic expression must not be a
function of node voltages or branch currents. Expressions
used in all other .MEASURE statements can contain either

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Equation Evaluation/ Arithmetic Expression)

2-103
 node voltages or branch currents, but must not use results
from other .MEASURE statements.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Equation Evaluation/ Arithmetic Expression)

2-104
.MEASURE (Average, RMS, MIN, MAX, INTEG, and PP)

SYNTAX:
.MEASURE <DC|AC|TRAN> result func out_var
+ <FROM = val> <TO = val> <GOAL = val>
+ <MINVAL = val> <WEIGHT = val>

EXAMPLE 1:
.MEAS TRAN avgval AVG V(10) FROM = 10ns TO = 55ns
This example calculates the average nodal voltage value for
node 10, during the transient sweep, from the time 10 ns to
55 ns. It prints out the result as avgval.

EXAMPLE 2:
.MEAS TRAN MAXVAL MAX V(1,2) FROM = 15ns TO = 100ns
This example finds the maximum voltage difference
between nodes 1 and 2, for the time period from 15 ns to 100
ns.

EXAMPLE 3:
.MEAS TRAN MINVAL MIN V(1,2) FROM = 15ns TO = 100ns
.MEAS TRAN P2PVAL PP I(M1) FROM = 10ns TO = 100ns

DESCRIPTION:
Average (AVG), RMS, MIN, MAX, and peak-to-peak (PP)
measurement modes report statistical functions of the
output variable, rather than analysis values.
• AVG calculates the area under an output variable,
divided by the periods of interest.

• RMS divides the square root of the area under the output
variable square, by the period of interest.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Average, RMS, MIN, MAX, INTEG, and PP)
2-105
 • MIN reports the minimum value of the output function,
over the specified interval.

• MAX reports the maximum value of the output function,

over the specified interval.

• PP (peak-to-peak) reports the maximum value, minus

the minimum value, over the specified interval.
AVG, RMS, and INTEG have no meaning in a DC data
sweep, so if you use them, HSPICE issues a warning
message.

Command
Definition
Argument

<DC|AC|TRAN> Specifies the analysis type for the measurement. If you

omit this parameter, HSPICE assumes the last
analysis mode that you requested.

FROM Specifies the initial value for the func calculation. For
transient analysis, this value is in units of time.

TO Specifies the end of the func calculation.

GOAL Specifies the .MEASURE value. Optimization uses

this value for ERR calculation. This equation
calculates the error:
ERRfun = ( GOAL – result ) ⁄ GOAL

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Average, RMS, MIN, MAX, INTEG, and PP)
2-106
 Command
Definition
Argument

func Indicates one of the measure statement types:

• AVG (average): Calculates the area under the
out_var, divided by the periods of interest.
• MAX (maximum): Reports the maximum value of
the out_var, over the specified interval.
• MIN (minimum): Reports the minimum value of the
out_var, over the specified interval.
• PP (peak-to-peak): Reports the maximum value,
minus the minimum value, of the out_var, over the
specified interval.
• RMS (root mean squared): Calculates the square
root of the area under the out_var2 curve, divided
by the period of interest.

result Name of the measured value, in the output. The value

is a function of the variable (out_var) and func.

out_var Name of any output variable whose function (func) the

simulation measures.

WEIGHT Multiplies the calculated error, by the weight value.

Used only in ERR calculation for optimization.
Default = 1.0.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Average, RMS, MIN, MAX, INTEG, and PP)
2-107
.MEASURE (Integral Function)

SYNTAX:
.MEASURE <DC|AC|TRAN> result INTEGRAL out_var
+ <FROM = val> <TO = val> <GOAL = val>
+ <MINVAL = val> <WEIGHT = val>

EXAMPLE:
.MEAS TRAN charge INTEG I(cload) FROM = 10ns
+ TO = 100ns
This example calculates the integral of I(cload), from 10 ns
to 100 ns.

DESCRIPTION:
The INTEGRAL function reports the integral of an output
variable, over a specified period.
The INTEGRAL function (with func), uses the same syntax
as the average (AVG), RMS, MIN, MAX, and peak-to-peak
(PP) measurement mode, to defined the INTEGRAL
(INTEG).

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Integral Function)

2-108
.MEASURE (Derivative Function)

SYNTAX:
.MEASURE <DC|AC|TRAN> result DERIVATIVE out_var
+ AT = val <GOAL = val> <MINVAL = val>
+ <WEIGHT = val>
.MEASURE <DC|AC|TRAN> result DERIVATIVE out_var
+ WHEN var2 = val <RISE = r | LAST>
+ <FALL = f | LAST> <CROSS = c | LAST> <TD = tdval>
+ <GOAL = goalval> <MINVAL = minval>
+ <WEIGHT = weightval>
.MEASURE <DC|AC|TRAN> result DERIVATIVE out_var
+ WHEN var2 = var3 <RISE = r | LAST>
+ <FALL = f | LAST> <CROSS = c | LAST> <TD = tdval>
+ <GOAL = goalval> <MINVAL = minval>
+ <WEIGHT = weightval>

EXAMPLE 1:
.MEAS TRAN slew rate DERIV V(out) AT = 25ns
This example calculates the derivative of V(out), at 25 ns.

EXAMPLE 2:
.MEAS TRAN slew DERIV v(1) WHEN v(1) = ’0.90*vdd’
This example calculates the derivative of v(1), when v(1) is
equal to 0.9*vdd.

EXAMPLE 3:
.MEAS AC delay DERIV ’VP(output)/360.0’ AT = 10khz
This example calculates the derivative of VP(output)/360.0,
when the frequency is 10 kHz.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Derivative Function)

2-109
 DESCRIPTION:
The DERIVATIVE function provides the derivative of:

• An output variable, at a specified time or frequency.

• Any sweep variable, depending on the type of analysis.

• A specified output variable, when some specific event

occurs.

Command
Definition
Argument

AT = val Value of out_var, at which the derivative is found.

CROSS = c The numbers indicate which occurrence of a CROSS,

RISE = r FALL, or RISE event starts a measurement.
FALL = f For RISE = r, when the designated signal has risen r
rise times, the WHEN condition is met, and
measurement starts.
For FALL = f, measurement starts when the designated
signal has fallen f fall times.
A crossing is either a rise or a fall, so for CROSS = c,
measurement starts when the designated signal has
achieved a total of c crossing times, as a result of either
rising or falling.

<DC|AC|TRAN> Specifies the analysis type to measure. If you omit this

parameter, HSPICE or HSPICE XT/RF assumes the
last analysis mode that you requested.

DERIVATIVE Selects the derivative function. You can abbreviate to

DERIV.

GOAL Specifies the desired .MEASURE value. Optimization

uses this value for ERR calculation. This equation
calculates the error:
ERRfun = ( GOAL – result ) ⁄ GOAL

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Derivative Function)

2-110
Command
Definition
Argument

LAST Measures when the last CROSS, FALL, or RISE event

occurs.
CROSS = LAST, measures the last time the WHEN
condition is true, for a rising or falling signal.
FALL = LAST, measures the last time WHEN is true, for
a falling signal.
RISE = LAST, measures the last time WHEN is true, for
a rising signal.
LAST is a reserved word; do not use it as a parameter
name in the above .MEASURE statements.

MINVAL If the absolute value of GOAL is less than MINVAL,

MINVAL replaces the GOAL value in the denominator
of the ERRfun expression. Used only in ERR
calculation for optimization. Default = 1.0e-12.

out_var Variable for which HSPICE finds the derivative.

result Name of the measured value, in the output.

TD Identifies the time when measurement starts.

var(2,3) These variables establish conditions that start a

measurement.

WEIGHT Multiplies the calculated error, between result and

GOAL, by the weight value. Used only in ERR
calculation for optimization. Default = 1.0.

WHEN Selects the WHEN function.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Derivative Function)

2-111
.MEASURE (Error Function)

SYNTAX:
.MEASURE <DC|AC|TRAN> result
+ ERRfun meas_var calc_var
+ <MINVAL = val> < IGNORE | YMIN = val>
+ <YMAX = val> <WEIGHT = val> <FROM = val>
+ <TO = val>

DESCRIPTION:
The relative error function reports the relative difference
between two output variables. You can use this format in
optimization and curve-fitting of measured data. The relative
error format specifies the variable to measure and calculate,
from the .PARAM variable. To calculate the relative error
between the two, HSPICE uses the ERR, ERR1, ERR2, or
ERR3 function. With this format, you can specify a group of
parameters to vary, to match the calculated value and the
measured data.

Command
Definition
Argument

<DC|AC|TRAN> Specifies the analysis type, for the measurement. If you

omit this parameter, HSPICE assumes the last analysis
mode that you requested.

result Name of the measured result, in the output.

ERRfun ERRfun indicates which error function to use: ERR,

ERR1, ERR2, or ERR3.

meas_var Name of any output variable or parameter, in the data

statement. M denotes the meas_var, in the error
equation.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Error Function)

2-112
Command
Definition
Argument

calc_var Name of the simulated output variable or parameter, in

the .MEASURE statement, to compare with meas_var.
C is the calc_var in the error equation.

IGNOR|YMIN If the absolute value of meas_var is less than the

IGNOR value, then the ERRfun calculation does not
consider this point. Default = 1.0e-15.

FROM Specifies the beginning of the ERRfun calculation. For

transient analysis, the from value is in units of time.
Defaults to the first value of the sweep variable.

WEIGHT Multiplies the calculated error, by the weight value.

Used only in ERR calculation for optimization.
Default = 1.0.

YMAX If the absolute value of meas_var is greater than the

YMAX value, then the ERRfun calculation does not
consider this point. Default = 1.0e+15.

TO End of the ERRfun calculation. Default is last value of

the sweep variable.

MINVAL If the absolute value of meas_var is less than MINVAL,

MINVAL replaces the meas_var value in the
denominator of the ERRfun expression. Used only in
ERR calculation for optimization. Default = 1.0e-12.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MEASURE (Error Function)

2-113
.MODEL

SYNTAX:
.MODEL mname type <VERSION = version_number>
+ <pname1 = val1 pname2 = val2 ...>
.MODEL mname OPT <parameter=val ...>
The following is the .MODEL syntax for use with .GRAPH:
.MODEL mname PLOT (pnam1 = val1 pnam2 = val2….)

EXAMPLE:
.MODEL MOD1 NPN BF=50 IS=1E-13 VBF=50 AREA=2 PJ=3,
+ N=1.05

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .MODEL command to include an instance (element)
of a pre-defined HSPICE model in your input netlist.
For each optimization within a data file, specify a .MODEL
statement. HSPICE can then execute more than one
optimization per simulation run. The .MODEL optimization
statement defines:
• Convergence criteria.

• Number of iterations.

• Derivative methods.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MODEL

2-114
Command
Definition
Argument

mname Model name reference. Elements must use this name to

refer to the model.
If model names contain periods (.), the automatic model
selector might fail.
When used with .GRAPH, this is the plot model name,
referenced in .GRAPH statements.

type Selects a model type. Must be one of the following.

AMP operational amplifier model
C capacitor model
CORE magnetic core model
D diode model
L inductor model or magnetic core mutual
inductor model
NJF n-channel JFET model
NMOS n-channel MOSFET model
NPN npn BJT model
OPT optimization model
PJF p-channel JFET model
PLOT plot model for the .GRAPH statement
PMOS p-channel MOSFET model
PNP pnp BJT model
R resistor model
U lossy transmission line model (lumped)
W lossy transmission line model
SP S parameter

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MODEL

2-115
 Command
Definition
Argument

pname1 ... Parameter name. Assign a model parameter name

(pname1) from the parameter names for the appropriate
model type. Each model section provides default values.
For legibility, enclose the parameter assignment list in
parentheses, and use either blanks or commas to separate
each assignment. Use a plus sign (+) to start a continuation
line.
When used with .GRAPH, each .GRAPH statement model
includes several model parameters. If you do not specify
model parameters, HSPICE uses the default values of the
model parameters, described in the following table. Pnamn
is one of the model parameters of a .GRAPH statement,
and valn is the value of pnamn. Valn can be more than one
parameter.

VERSION HSPICE version number. Allows portability of the BSIM

(LEVEL=13) and BSIM2 (LEVEL = 39) models, between
HSPICE releases. HSPICE release numbers, and the
corresponding version numbers, are:
HSPICE release Version number
9007B 9007.02
9007D 9007.04
92A 92.01
92B 92.02
93A 93.01
93A.02 93.02
95.3 95.3
96.1 96.1

The VERSION parameter is valid only for LEVEL 13 and

LEVEL 39 models. Use it with HSPICE Release H93A.02
and higher. If you use the parameter with any other model,
or with a release before H93A.02, HSPICE issues a
warning, but the simulation continues.You can also use
VERSION to denote the BSIM3v3 version number only, in
model LEVELs 49 and 53. For LEVELs 49 and 53, the
HSPVER parameter denotes the HSPICE release number.

PLOT Keyword for a .GRAPH statement model.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MODEL

2-116
You can specify the following OPT parameters in
the .MODEL statement:

Parameter Description

mname Model name. Elements use this name to refer to the model.

CENDIF Selects different derivative methods. Default=1.0e-9.

The following calculates the gradient of the RESULTS
functions:
||Transpose(Jacobi(F(X))) * F(X)||, where F(X) is the
RESULT function
If the resulting gradient is less than CENDIF, HSPICE uses
more accurate but more time-consuming derivative
methods. By default, HSPICE uses faster but less-accurate
derivative methods. To use the more-accurate methods, set
CENDIF to a larger value than GRAD.
If the gradient of the RESULTS function is less than GRAD,
optimization finishes before CENDIF takes effect.
• If the value is too large, the optimizer requires more CPU
time.
• If the value is too small, the optimizer might not find as
accurate an answer.

CLOSE Initial estimate of how close parameter initial value

estimates are, to the solution. CLOSE multiplies changes in
new parameter estimates. If you use a large CLOSE value,
the optimizer takes large steps toward the solution. For a
small value, the optimizer takes smaller steps toward the
solution. You can use a smaller value for close parameter
estimates, and a larger value for rough initial guesses.
Default=1.0.
• If CLOSE is greater than 100, the steepest descent in the
Levenburg-Marquardt algorithm dominates.
• If CLOSE is less than 1, the Gauss-Newton method
dominates.
For more details, see L. Spruiell, “Optimization Error
Surfaces,” Meta-Software Journal, Volume 1, Number 4,
December 1994.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MODEL

2-117
 Parameter Description

CUT Modifies CLOSE, depending on how successful iterations

are, toward the solution.
If the last iteration succeeds, descent toward the CLOSE
solution decreases by the CUT value. That is, CLOSE =
CLOSE / CUT
If the last iteration was not a successful descent to the
solution, CLOSE increases by CUT squared. That is, CLOSE
= CLOSE * CUT * CUT
CUT drives CLOSE up or down, depending on the relative
success in finding the solution. The CUT value must be > 1.
Default = 2.0.

DIFSIZ Increment change in a parameter value, for gradient

calculations (∆x = DIFSIZ ⋅ max(x, 0.1) ). If you specify delta
in a .PARAM statement, then ∆x = delta. Default = 1e-3.

GRAD Represents possible convergence, if the gradient of the

RESULTS function is less than GRAD. Most applications
use values of 1e-6 to 1e-5. Too large a value can stop the
optimizer before finding the best solution. Too small a value
requires more iterations. Default=1.0e-6.

ITROPT Maximum number of iterations. Typically, you need no more

than 20-40 iterations, to find a solution. Too many iterations
can imply that the RELIN, GRAD, or RELOUT values are
too small. Default=20.

LEVEL Selects an optimizing algorithm. Currently, the only option is

LEVEL=1, a modified Levenburg-Marquardt algorithm.

MAX Sets the upper limit on CLOSE. Use values > 100.
Default=6.0e+5.

PARMIN Allows better control of incremental parameter changes,

during error calculations. Default=0.1. This produces more
control over the trade-off between simulation time and
optimization result accuracy. To calculate parameter
increments, HSPICE uses the relationship:
Dpar_val = DIFSIZ ⋅ MAX(par_val, PARMIN)

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MODEL

2-118
Parameter Description

RELIN Sets the relative input parameter (delta_par_val /

MAX(par_val,1e-6)), for convergence. If all optimizing input
parameters vary by no more than RELIN between iterations,
the solution converges. RELIN is a relative variance test, so
a value of 0.001 implies that optimizing parameters vary by
less than 0.1%, from one iteration to the next.
Default=0.001.

RELOUT Sets the relative tolerance to finish optimization. For

RELOUT=0.001, if the relative difference in the RESULTS
functions, from one iteration to the next, is less than 0.001,
then optimization is finished. Default=0.001.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .MODEL

2-119
.NET

SYNTAX:
One-Port Network
.NET input <RIN = val>
.NET input <val>
Two-Port Network
.NET output input <ROUT = val> <RIN = val>

EXAMPLE:
One-Port Network
.NET VINAC RIN = 50
.NET IIN RIN = 50
Two-Port Network
.NET V(10,30) VINAC ROUT = 75RIN = 50
.NET I(RX) VINAC ROUT = 75RIN = 50

DESCRIPTION:
You can use the .NET statement to compute parameters for:

• Z impedance matrix.
• Y admittance matrix.
• H hybrid matrix

• S scattering matrix.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .NET

2-120
HSPICE also computes:
• Input impedance.
• Output impedance.

• Admittance.

This analysis is part of AC small-signal analysis. To run

network analysis, specify the frequency sweep for the AC
statement.

Command
Definition
Argument

input Name of the voltage or current source for AC input.

output Output port. It can be:

• An output voltage, V(n1,n2).
• An output current, I(source), or I(element).

RIN Keyword, for input or source resistance. RIN calculates

output impedance, output admittance, and scattering
parameters. The default RIN value is 1 ohm.

ROUT Keyword, for output or load resistance. ROUT calculates

input impedance, admittance, and scattering parameters.
Default=1 ohm.

SEE ALSO:
.AC

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .NET

2-121
.NODESET

SYNTAX:
.NODESET V(node1) = val1 <V(node2) = val2 ...>
or
.NODESET node1 val1 <node2 val2>

EXAMPLE:
.NODESET V(5:SETX) = 3.5V V(X1.X2.VINT) = 1V
.NODESET V(12) = 4.5 V(4) = 2.23
.NODESET 12 4.5 4 2.23 1 1

DESCRIPTION:
.NODESET initializes all specified nodal voltages, for DC
operating point analysis. Use the .NODESET statement, to
correct convergence problems in DC analysis. If you set the
node values in the circuit, close to the actual DC operating
point solution, you enhance convergence of the simulation.
The HSPICE simulator uses the NODESET voltages, only in
the first iteration.

Command
Definition
Argument

node1 ... Node numbers or names can include full paths or circuit
numbers.

val1 Specifies voltages.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .NODESET

2-122
.NOISE

SYNTAX:
.NOISE ovv srcnam inter

EXAMPLE:
.NOISE V(5) VIN 10

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .NOISE and .AC statements to control the noise
analysis of the circuit.

Command
Definition
Argument

ovv Nodal voltage output variable. Defines the node at which

HSPICE sums the noise.

srcnam Name of the independent voltage or current source, to use

as the noise input reference

inter Interval at which HSPICE prints a noise analysis summary.

inter specifies how many frequency points to summarize in
the AC sweep. If you omit inter, or set it to zero, HSPICE
does not print a summary. If inter is equal to or greater than
one, HSPICE prints summary for the first frequency, and
once for each subsequent increment of the inter frequency.
The noise report is sorted according to the contribution of
each node to the overall noise level.

SEE ALSO:
.AC

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .NOISE

2-123
.OP

SYNTAX:
.OP <format> <time> <format> <time>... <interpolation>

EXAMPLE 1:
.OP .5NS CUR 10NS VOL 17.5NS 20NS 25NS
This example calculates:
• Operating point voltages and currents, for the DC
solution.

• Currents at 10 ns, for the transient analysis.

• Voltages at 17.5 ns, 20 ns and 25 ns, for the transient
analysis.
EXAMPLE 2:
.OP
This example calculates the complete DC operating point
solution. The next section shows a printout of the solution.

DESCRIPTION:
When you include an .OP statement in an input file, HSPICE
calculates the DC operating point of the circuit. You can also
use the .OP statement to produce an operating point, during
a transient analysis. You can include only one .OP
statement in a simulation.
If an analysis requires calculating an operating point, you do
not need to specify the .OP statement; HSPICE calculates
an operating point. If you use a .OP statement, and if you
include the UIC keyword in a .TRAN analysis statement,
then simulation omits the time = 0 operating point analysis,
and issues a warning in the output listing.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .OP

2-124
Command
Definition
Argument

format Any of the following keywords. Only the first letter is

required. Default = ALL
• ALL: Full operating point, including voltage, currents,
conductances, and capacitances. This parameter
outputs voltage/current for the specified time.
• BRIEF: Produces a one-line summary of each element’s
voltage, current, and power. Current is stated in
milliamperes, and power is in milliwatts.
• CURRENT: Voltage table, with a brief summary of
element currents and power.
• DEBUG: Usually invoked only if a simulation does not
converge. Debug prints back the non-convergent nodes,
with the new voltage, old voltage, and the tolerance
(degree of non-convergence). It also prints back the non-
convergent elements, with their tolerance values.
• NONE: Inhibits node and element print-outs, but
performs additional analysis that you specify.
• VOLTAGE: Voltage table only.
The preceding keywords are mutually- exclusive; use only
one at a time.

time Place this parameter directly after ALL, VOLTAGE,

CURRENT, or DEBUG. It specifies the time at which
HSPICE prints the report.

interpolation Selects an interpolation method for .OP time points during

transient analysis, or no interpolation. Only the first
character is required; that is, typing i has the same effect as
typing interpolation. Default is not active.
If you specify interpolation, all of the time points in the .OP
statement (except time=0) use the interpolation method to
calculate the OP value during the transient analysis. If you
use this keyword, it must be at the end of the .OP statement.
HSPICE ignores any word after this keyword.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .OP

2-125
.OPTION
For detailed descriptions of all simulation options that you
can set using .OPTION commands, see Chapter 3, “Options
in HSPICE Netlists”

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

2-126
.PARAM

SYNTAX:
Simple parameter assignment:
.PARAM <ParamName>=<RealNumber>
Algebraic parameter assignments:
.PARAM <ParamName>=’<AlgebraicExpression>’
.PARAM <ParamName1>=<ParamName2>
User-defined functions:
.PARAM <ParamName>(<pv1>[<pv2>])=’<Expression>’
Pre-defined analysis functions:
.PARAM <FunctionName> = <Value>
Optimized parameter assignment:
.PARAM parameter=OPTxxx (initial_guess, low_limit,
+ upper_limit)
.PARAM parameter=OPTxxx (initial_guess, low_limit,
+ upper_limit, delta)

EXAMPLE 1:
* Simple parameter assignment
.PARAM power_cylces=256

EXAMPLE 2:
* Numerical parameter assignment
.PARAM TermValue = 1g
rTerm Bit0 0 TermValue
rTerm Bit1 0 TermValue
...

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PARAM

2-127
 EXAMPLE 3:
* Parameter assignment using expressions
.PARAM Pi = ’355/113’
.PARAM Pi2 = ’2*Pi’
.PARAM npRatio = 2.1
.PARAM nWidth = 3u
.PARAM pWidth = ’nWidth * npRatio’
Mp1 ... <pModelName> W = pWidth
Mn1 ... <nModelName> W = nWidth
...

EXAMPLE 4:
* Algebraic parameter
.param x=cos(2)+sin(2)

EXAMPLE 5:
* Algebraic expression as an output variable
.PRINT DC v(3) gain=PAR(‘v(3)/v(2)’)
+ PAR(‘V(4)/V(2)’)

EXAMPLE 6:
* My own user-defined functions
.PARAM <MyFunc( x, y )> = ‘Sqrt((x*x)+(y*y))’
.PARAM CentToFar (c) = ’(((c*9)/5)+32)’
.PARAM F(p1,p2) = ’Log(Cos(p1)*Sin(p2))’
.PARAM SqrdProd (a,b) = ’(a*a)*(b*b)’

EXAMPLE 7:
* Pre-defined analysis function
.PARAM mcVar = Agauss(1.0,0.1)

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PARAM

2-128
EXAMPLE 8:
.PARAM vtx=OPT1(.7,.3,1.0) uox=OPT1(650,400,900)
In this example, uox and vtx are the variable model
parameters, which optimize a model for a selected set of
electrical specifications.
The estimated initial value for the vtx parameter is 0.7 volts.
You can vary this value within the limits of 0.3 and 1.0 volts,
for the optimization procedure. The optimization parameter
reference name (OPT1) references the associated
optimization analysis statement (not shown).
DESCRIPTION:
The .PARAM statement defines parameters. Parameters in
HSPICE are names that have associated numeric values.
A parameter definition in HSPICE always uses the last value
found in the input netlist (subject to local versus global
parameter rules).
Use any of the following methods to define parameters:

• A simple parameter assignment is a constant real

number. The parameter keeps this value, unless a later
definition changes its value, or an algebraic expression
assigns a new value during simulation. HSPICE does not
warn you if it reassigns a parameter.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PARAM

2-129
 • An algebraic parameter (equation) is an algebraic
expression of real values, a predefined or user-defined
function, or circuit or model values. Enclose a complex
expression in single quotes to invoke the algebraic
processor, unless the expression begins with an
alphabetic character and contains no spaces. A simple
expression consists of a single parameter name. To use
an algebraic expression as an output variable in a
.PRINT, .PLOT, or .PROBE statement, use the PAR
keyword.

• A user-defined function assignment is similar to an

algebraic parameter. HSPICE extends the algebraic
parameter definition to include function parameters, used
in the algebraic that defines the function. You can nest
user-defined functions up to three deep.
• A pre-defined analysis function. HSPICE provides
several specialized analysis types, which require a way
to control the analysis:
- Temperature functions (fn)

- Optimization guess/range
- frequency

- time
- Monte Carlo functions

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PARAM

2-130
Command
Definition
Argument

OPTxxx Optimization parameter reference name. The associated

optimization analysis references this name. Must agree with
the OPTxxx name in the analysis command associated with
an OPTIMIZE keyname.

parameter Parameter to vary.

• Initial value estimate
• Lower limit.
• Upper limit.
If the optimizer does not find the best solution within these
constraints, it attempts to find the best solution without
constraints.

delta The final parameter value is the initial guess ± (n⋅delta). If

you do not specify delta, the final parameter value is
between low_limit and upper_limit. For example, you can
use this parameter to optimize transistor drawn widths and
lengths, which must be quantized.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PARAM

2-131
.PKG

SYNTAX:
.PKG pkgname
+file= ’pkgfilename’
+model= ’pkgmodelname’

EXAMPLE 1:
.pkg p_test
+ file=’processor_clk_ff.ibs’
+ model=’FCPGA_FF_PKG’

EXAMPLE 2:
The following example shows how pin1 is referenced:
p_test_pin1_dia and p_test_pin1

The element name becomes:

w_p_test_pin1_?? or r_p_test_pin1_?? ...

DESCRIPTION:
The .PKG command provides the IBIS(V 3.2) Package
Model feature. It supports both sections and matrixes.

Command
Definition
Argument

pkgname package card name

pkgfilename name of a .pkg or .ibs file that contains package models.

pkgmodelname working model in the .pkg file

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PKG

2-132
The .PKG command automatically creates a series of
elements (W or rlc). The following nodes are referenced in
the netlist:

• Nodes on the die side:

’pkgname’_’pinname’_dia

• Nodes on the pin side:

’pkgname’_’pinname’

See Example 2 for how pin1 is referenced.

SEE ALSO:
.EBD
.IBIS

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PKG

2-133
.PLOT

SYNTAX:
.PLOT antype ov1 <(plo1,phi1)> <ov2> <(plo2,phi2)> ...>

EXAMPLE 1:
.PLOT DC V(4) V(5) V(1) PAR(`I1(Q1)/I2(Q1)')
.PLOT TRAN V(17,5) (2,5) I(VIN) V(17) (1,9)
.PLOT AC VM(5) VM(31,24) VDB(5) VP(5) INOISE

• In the first line, PAR plots the ratio of the collector current
and the base current, for the Q1 transistor.

• In the second line, the VDB output variable plots the AC

analysis results (in decibels), for node 5.
• In the third line, the AC plot can include NOISE results
and other variables that you specify.

EXAMPLE 2:
.PLOT AC ZIN YOUT(P) S11(DB) S12(M) Z11(R)
.PLOT DISTO HD2 HD3(R) SIM2
.PLOT TRAN V(5,3) V(4) (0,5) V(7) (0,10)
.PLOT DC V(1) V(2) (0,0) V(3) V(4) (0,5)
In the last line above, HSPICE sets the plot limits for V(1)
and V(2), but you specify 0 and 5 volts as the plot limits for
V(3) and V(4).

DESCRIPTION:
The .PLOT statement plots the output values of one or more
variables, in a selected HSPICE analysis. Each .PLOT
statement defines the contents of one plot, which can
contain more than one output variable.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PLOT

2-134
If more than one output variable appears on the same plot,
HSPICE prints and plots the first variable specified. To print
out more than one variable, include another .PLOT
statement.
You can include wildcards in .PLOT statements.

Command
Definition
Argument

antype Type of analysis for the specified plots. Analysis types are:
DC, AC, TRAN, NOISE, or DISTO.

ov1 … Output variables to plot: voltage, current, or element

template, from a DC, AC, TRAN, NOISE, or DISTO
analysis. See the next sections for syntax.

plo1, Lower and upper plot limits. The plot for each output
phi1 … variable uses the first set of plot limits, after the output
variable name. Set a new plot limit for each output variable,
after the first plot limit. For example, to plot all output
variables that use the same scale, specify one set of plot
limits at the end of the .PLOT statement. If you set the plot
limits to (0,0) HSPICE automatically sets the plot limits.

SEE ALSO:
.DOUT
.GRAPH
.MEASURE
.PRINT
.PROBE
.STIM

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PLOT

2-135
.PRINT

SYNTAX:
.PRINT antype ov1 <ov2 … >

EXAMPLE 1:
* CASE 1
.print v(din) i(mxn18)
.dc vdin 0 5.0 0.05
.tran 1ns 60ns
* CASE 2
.dc vdin 0 5.0 0.05
.tran 1ns 60ns
.print v(din) i(mxn18)
* CASE 3
.dc vdin 0 5.0 0.05
.print v(din) i(mxn18)
.tran 1ns 60ns

• If you replace the .PRINT statement with:

.print TRAN v(din) i(mnx)
then all three cases have identical .sw0 and .tr0 files.
• If you replace the .print statement with:
.print DC v(din) i(mnx)
then the .sw0 and .tr0 files are different.

EXAMPLE 2:
.PRINT TRAN V (4) I(VIN) PAR(`V(OUT)/V(IN)')
This example prints the results of a transient analysis, for the
nodal voltage named 4. It also prints the current, through the
voltage source named VIN. It also prints the ratio of the
nodal voltage at the OUT and IN nodes.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PRINT

2-136
EXAMPLE 3:
.PRINT AC VM(4,2) VR(7) VP(8,3) II(R1)

• Depending on the value of the ACOUT option, VM(4,2)

prints the AC magnitude of the voltage difference, or the
difference of the voltage magnitudes, between nodes 4
and 2.
• VR(7) prints the real part of the AC voltage, between
node 7 and ground.

• Depending on the ACOUT value, VP(8,3) prints the

phase of the voltage difference between nodes 8 and 3,
or the difference of the phase of voltage at node 8 and
voltage at node 3.

• II(R1) prints the imaginary part of the current, through R1.

EXAMPLE 4:
.PRINT AC ZIN YOUT(P) S11(DB) S12(M) Z11(R)
This example prints:
• The magnitude of the input impedance.

• The phase of the output admittance.

• Several S and Z parameters.

This statement accompanies a network analysis, using

the .AC and .NET analysis statements.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PRINT

2-137
 EXAMPLE 5:
.PRINT DC V(2) I(VSRC) V(23,17) I1(R1) I1(M1)
This example prints the DC analysis results for several
different nodal voltages and currents, through:
• The resistor named R1.

• The voltage source named VSRC.

• The drain-to-source current of the MOSFET named M1.

EXAMPLE 6:
.PRINT NOISE INOISE
This example prints the equivalent input noise.
EXAMPLE 7:
.PRINT DISTO HD3 SIM2(DB)
This example prints the magnitude of third-order harmonic
distortion, and the decibel value of the intermodulation
distortion sum, through the load resistor that you specify in
the .DISTO statement.

EXAMPLE 8:
.PRINT AC INOISE ONOISE VM(OUT) HD3
This statement includes NOISE, DISTO, and AC output
variables in the same .PRINT statement in HSPICE.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PRINT

2-138
EXAMPLE 9:
.PRINT pj1 = par(‘p(rd) +p(rs)‘)
This statement prints the value of pj1, with the specified
function.
HSPICE ignores .PRINT statement references to
nonexistent netlist part names, and prints those names in a
warning.

EXAMPLE 10:
Derivative function:
.PRINT der=deriv('v(NodeX)')
Integrate function:
.PRINT int = integ('v(NodeX)')
The parameter can be a node voltage, or a reasonable
expression.

EXAMPLE 11:
.print p1 = 3
.print p2 = par("p1*5")
You can use p1 and p2 as parameters in netlist. The p1
value is 3; the p2 value is 15.
DESCRIPTION:
The .PRINT statement specifies output variables, for which
HSPICE prints values. You can include wildcards in .PRINT
statements.
You can also use the iall keyword in a .PRINT statement, to
print all branch currents of all diode, BJT, JFET, or MOSFET
elements in your circuit design.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PRINT

2-139
 Command
Definition
Argument

antype Type of analysis for outputs. Antype is one of the following

types: DC, AC, TRAN, NOISE, or DISTO.

ov1 … Output variables to print. These are voltage, current, or

element template variables, from a DC, AC, TRAN, NOISE,
or DISTO analysis.

SEE ALSO:
.DOUT
.GRAPH
.MEASURE
.PLOT
.PROBE
.STIM

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PRINT

2-140
.PROBE

SYNTAX:
.PROBE antype ov1 <ov2 ...>

EXAMPLE 1:
.PROBE DC V(4) V(5) V(1) beta = PAR(`I1(Q1)/I2(Q1)')

EXAMPLE 2:
* Derivative function
.PROBE der=deriv('v(NodeX)')
* Integrate function
.PROBE int = integ('v(NodeX)')

DESCRIPTION:
The .PROBE statement saves output variables into
interface and graph data files.The parameter can be a node
voltage, or a reasonable expression. You can include
wildcards in .PROBE statements.

Command
Definition
Argument

antype Type of analysis for the specified plots. Analysis types are:
DC, AC, TRAN, NOISE, or DISTO.

ov1 … Output variables to plot: voltage, current, or element template

variables from a DC, AC, TRAN, NOISE, or DISTO
analysis. .PROBE can include more than one output variable.

SEE ALSO:
.DOUT
.GRAPH
.MEASURE
.PLOT
.PRINT
.STIM

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PROBE

2-141
.PROTECT

SYNTAX:
.PROTECT

DESCRIPTION:
The .PROTECT statement keeps models and cell libraries
private.

• The .PROTECT statement suppresses printing text from

the list file, such as when you use the BRIEF option.

• The .UNPROTECT command restores normal output

functions.
• Any elements and models located between a .PROTECT
and an .UNPROTECT statement, inhibit the element and
model listing from the LIST option.

• The .OPTION NODE nodal cross reference, and the .OP

operating point printout, do not list any nodes that are
contained within the .PROTECT and .UNPROTECT
statements.

SEE ALSO:
.UNPROTECT

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PROTECT

2-142
.PZ

SYNTAX:
.PZ output input
.PZ ov srcname

EXAMPLE:
.PZ V(10) VIN
.PZ I(RL) ISORC

• In the first pole/zero analysis, the output is the voltage for

node 10, and the input is the VIN independent voltage
source.

• In the second pole/zero analysis, the output is the branch

current for the RL branch, and the input is the ISORC
independent current source.

DESCRIPTION:
The .PZ command performs pole/zero analysis (you do not
need to specify .OP). See “Pole/Zero Analysis” in the
HSPICE Applications Manual, for complete information
about pole/zero analysis.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PZ

2-143
 .

Command
Definition
Argument
input Input source. Can be the name of any independent voltage
or current source.
output Output variables, which can be:
• Any node voltage, V(n).
• Any branch current, I(branch_name).
ov Output variable: a node voltage V(n), or branch current
I(element)
srcnam Input source: an independent voltage or current source
name

SEE ALSO:
.DC

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .PZ

2-144
.SAMPLE

SYNTAX:
.SAMPLE FS = freq <TOL = val> <NUMF = val>
+ <MAXFLD = val> <BETA = val>

DESCRIPTION:
To acquire data from analog signals, use the .SAMPLE
statement, with the .NOISE and .AC statements, to analyze
data sampling noise in HSPICE. The SAMPLE analysis
performs a noise-folding analysis, at the output node.
.

Command
Definition
Argument
FS = freq Sample frequency, in Hertz.
TOL Sampling-error tolerance: the ratio of the noise power (in the
highest folding interval) to the noise power (in baseband).
Default = 1.0e-3.
NUMF Maximum number of frequencies that you can specify. The
algorithm requires about ten times this number of internally-
generated frequencies, so keep this value small.
Default = 100.
MAXFLD Maximum number of folding intervals (default = 10.0). The
highest frequency (in Hertz) that you can specify is:
FMAX = MAXFLD ⋅ FS
BETA Optional noise integrator (duty cycle), at the sampling node:
BETA = 0 no integrator
BETA = 1 simple integrator (default)
If you clock the integrator (integrates during a fraction of the
1/FS sampling interval), then set BETA to the duty cycle of
the integrator.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SAMPLE

2-145
.SAVE

SYNTAX:
.SAVE <TYPE = type_keyword> <FILE = save_file>
+ <LEVEL = level_keyword> <TIME = save_time>

EXAMPLE:
.TEMP -25 0 25
.SAVE TYPE=NODESET FILE=my_design.ic0 LEVEL=ALL
+ TIME=0
This example saves the operating point corresponding
to .TEMP -25, to a file named my_design.ic0.

DESCRIPTION:
The .SAVE statement in HSPICE stores the operating point
of a circuit, in a file that you specify. For quick DC
convergence in subsequent simulations, use the .LOAD
statement to input the contents of this file. HSPICE saves
the operating point by default, even if the HSPICE input file
does not contain a .SAVE statement. To not save the
operating point, specify .SAVE LEVEL = NONE.
You can save the operating point data as either an .IC or
a .NODESET statement.
A parameter or temperature sweep saves only the first
operating point.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SAVE

2-146
.

Command
Definition
Argument
type_keyword Storage method, for saving the operating point. The type
can be one of the following. Default is NODESET.
• .NODESET: Stores the operating point as a .NODESET
statement. Later simulations initialize all node voltages to
these values, if you use the .LOAD statement. If circuit
conditions change incrementally, DC converges within a
few iterations.
• .IC: Stores the operating point as a .IC statement. Later
simulations initialize node voltages to these values if the
netlist includes the .LOAD statements.
save_file Name of the file that stores DC operating point data. The file
name format is <design>.ic#. Default is <design>.ic0.
level_keyword Circuit level, at which you save the operating point. The
level can be one of the following.
• ALL (default): Saves all nodes, from the top to the lowest
circuit level. This option offers the greatest improvement
in simulation time.
• TOP: Saves only nodes in the top-level design. Does not
save subcircuit nodes.
• NONE: Does not save the operating point.
save_time Time during transient analysis, when HSPICE saves the
operating point. HSPICE requires a valid transient analysis
statement, to save a DC operating point. Default = 0.

SEE ALSO:
.LOAD

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SAVE

2-147
.SENS

SYNTAX:
.SENS ov1 <ov2 ...>

EXAMPLE:
.SENS V(9) V(4,3) V(17) I(VCC)

DESCRIPTION:
The .SENS command obtains DC small-signal sensitivities
of output variables, for circuit parameters (you do not need
to specify .OP).
If the input file includes a .SENS statement, HSPICE
determines DC small-signal sensitivities for each specified
output variable, relative to every circuit parameter. The
sensitivity measurement is the partial derivative of each
output variable, for a specified circuit element, measured at
the operating point, and normalized to the total change in
output magnitude. Therefore, the sum of the sensitivities of
all elements is 100%. HSPICE calculates sensitivities for:

• resistors
• voltage sources
• current sources

• diodes
• BJTs (including Level 4, the VBIC95 model)
• MOSFETs (Level49 and Level53, Version=3.22).
You can perform only one .SENS analysis per simulation. If
you specify more than one .SENS statement, HSPICE runs
only the last .SENS statement.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SENS

2-148
 The .SENS statement can generate very large amounts of
output for large circuits.
.

Command
Definition
Argument
ov1 ov2 ... Branch currents, or nodal voltage, for DC component-
sensitivity analysis

SEE ALSO:
.DC

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SENS

2-149
.SHAPE

SYNTAX:
.SHAPE sname Shape_Descriptor

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .SHAPE statement to define a shape. The Field
Solver uses the shape to describe a cross-section of the
conductor.
Command
Definition
Argument
sname Shape name.
Shape_Descriptor One of the following:
• Rectangle
• Circle
• Strip
• Polygon

SEE ALSO:
.FSOPTIONS
.MATERIAL
.SHAPE

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SHAPE

2-150
.SHAPE (Defining Rectangles)

SYNTAX:
.SHAPE RECTANGLE WIDTH=val HEIGHT=val <NW=val>
+ <NH=val>

DESCRIPTION:
Use the RECTANGLE option to define a rectangle. Normally,
you do not need to specify the NW and NH values because
the field solver automatically sets these values, depending
on the accuracy mode. You can specify both values, or
specify only one of these values and let the solver determine
the other.

Figure 2-2 Coordinates of a Rectangle

y WIDTH

HEIGHT

Origin

(0,0) x

Command
Definition
Argument
WIDTH Width of the rectangle (size in the x-direction).
HEIGHT Height of the rectangle (size in the y-direction).
NW Number of horizontal (x) segments in a rectangle, with a
specified width.
NH Number of vertical (y) segments in a rectangle, with a
specified height.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SHAPE (Defining Rectangles)

2-151
.SHAPE (Defining Circles)

SYNTAX:
.SHAPE CIRCLE RADIUS=val <N=val>

DESCRIPTION:
The CIRCLE option to defines a circle in the Field Solver.
The Field Solver approximates a circle as an inscribed
regular polygon, with N edges. The more edges, the more
accurate the circle approximation is.
Do not use the CIRCLE descriptor to model actual polygons;
instead use the POLYGON descriptor.
Normally, you do not need to specify the N value, because
the field solver automatically sets this value, depending on
the accuracy mode. But you can specify this value if you
need to
Figure 2-3 Coordinates of a Circle
y
Origin RADIUS

Starting vertex
of the inscribed
polygon

(0,0) x

Command
Definition
Argument
RADIUS Radius of the circle.
N Number of segments to approximate a circle with a specified
radius.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SHAPE (Defining Circles)

2-152
.SHAPE (Defining Polygons)

SYNTAX:
.SHAPE POLYGON VERTEX=(x1 y1 x2 y2 ...)
+ <N=(n1,n2,...)>

EXAMPLE 1:
The following rectangular polygon uses the default number
of segments:
POLYGON VERTEX=(1 10 1 11 5 11 5 10)

EXAMPLE 2:
The following rectangular polygon uses five segments for
each edge:
POLYGON VERTEX=(1 10 1 11 5 11 5 10) N=5

EXAMPLE 3:
Rectangular polygon, using the different number of
segments for each edge:
POLYGON VERTEX=(1 10 1 11 5 11 5 10) N=(5 3
+ 5 3)

DESCRIPTION:
The POLYGON command option defines a polygon in a
Field Solver. The specified coordinates are within the local
coordinate, with respect to the origin of a conductor.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SHAPE (Defining Polygons)

2-153
Figure 2-4 Coordinates of a Polygon

Origin

(0,0) x

Command
Definition
Argument
VERTEX (x, y) coordinates of vertices. Listed either in clockwise or
counter-clockwise direction.
N Number of segments that define the polygon, with the
specified X and Y coordinates. You can specify a different N
value for each edge. If you specify only one N value, then
the Field Solver uses this value for all edges.
For example, the first value of N, n1, corresponds to the
number of segments for the edge from (x1 y1) to (x2 y2).

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SHAPE (Defining Polygons)

2-154
.SHAPE (Defining Strip Polygons)

SYNTAX:
.SHAPE STRIP WIDTH=val <N=val>

DESCRIPTION:
Normally, you do not need to specify the N value, because
the field solver automatically sets this value, depending on
the accuracy mode. But you can specify this value if you
need to. The field solver (filament method) does not support
this shape.

Figure 2-5 Coordinates of a Strip Polygon

WIDTH
y

Origin

(0,0) x

Command
Definition
Argument
WIDTH Width of the strip (size in the x-direction).
N Number of segments that define the strip shape, with the
specified width.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SHAPE (Defining Strip Polygons)

2-155
.STIM

SYNTAX:
General
.STIM <tran|ac|dc> PWL|DATA|VEC
+ <filename=output_filename> ...
PWL Source (Transient Analysis Only)
.STIM [tran] PWL [filename=output_filename]
+ [name1=] ovar1 [node1=n+] [node2=n-]
+ [[name2=]ovar2 [node1=n+] [node2=n-] ...]
+ [from=val] [to=val] [npoints=val]
.STIM [tran] PWL [filename=output_filename]
+ [name1=] ovar1 [node1=n+] [node2=n-]
+ [[name2=]ovar2 [node1=n+] [node2=n-] ...]
+ indepvar=[(]t1 [t2 ...[)]]
Data Card
.STIM [tran |ac |dc] DATA [filename=output_filename]
+ dataname [name1=] ovar1
+ [[name2=]ovar2 ...] [from= val] [to=val]
+ [npoints=val] [indepout=val]
.STIM [tran |ac |dc] DATA [filename=output_filename]
+ dataname [name1=] ovar1
+ [[name2=]ovar2 ...] indepvar=[(]t1 [t2 ...[)]]
+ [indepout=val]

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .STIM

2-156
Digital Vector File (Transient Analysis Only)
.STIM [tran] VEC [filename=output_filename]
+ vth=val vtl=val [voh=val] [vol=val]
+ [name1=] ovar1 [[name2=] ovar2 ...]
+ [from=val] [to=val] [npoints=val]
.STIM [tran] VEC [filename=output_filename]
+ vth=val vtl=val [voh=val] [vol=val]
+ [name1=] ovar1 [[name2=] ovar2 ...]
+ indepvar=[(]t1 [t2 ...[)]]
Brackets [ ] in the syntax enclose comments, which are
optional.

DESCRIPTION:
You can use the .STIM statement to reuse the results
(output) of one simulation, as input stimuli in a new
simulation.
The .STIM statement specifies:

• Expected stimulus (PWL Source, DATA CARD, or VEC

FILE).
• Signals to transform.
• Independent variables.

One .STIM statement produces one corresponding output

file.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .STIM

2-157
Table 2-1 .STIM PWL Source Arguments
Command
Definition
Argument
tran Transient simulation.
filename Output file name. If you do not specify a file, HSPICE uses
the input filename.
namei PWL Source Name that you specify. The name must start
with V (for a voltage source) or I (for a current source).
ovari Output variable that you specify. ovar can be:
• Node voltage.
• Element current.
• Parameter string. If you use a parameter string, you must
specify name1.
For example:
v(1), i(r1), v(2,1), par(’v(1)+v(2)’)
node1 Positive terminal node name.
node2 Negative terminal node name.
from Keyword; specifies the time to start output of simulation
results. For transient analysis, uses the time units that you
specified.
npoints Number of output time points.
to Keyword; specifies the time to end output of simulation
results. For transient analysis, uses the time units that you
specified. The from value can be greater than the to value.
indepvar Keyword; specifies dispersed (independent-variable) time
points. You must specify dispersed time points in increasing
order.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .STIM

2-158
Table 2-2 .STIM Data Card Arguments
Command
Definition
Argument
tran | ac | dc Selects the simulation type: transient, AC, or DC.
filename Output file name. If you do not specify a file, HSPICE uses
the input filename.
dataname Name of the data card to generate.
from Keyword; specifies the time to start output of simulation
results. For transient analysis, uses the time units that you
specified.
to Keyword; specifies the time to end output of simulation
results. For transient analysis, uses the time units that you
specified.
namei Name of a parameter of the data card to generate.
npoints Number of output independent-variable points.
indepvar Keyword; specifies dispersed independent-variable points.
indepout Indicates whether to generate the independent variable
column.
• indepout, indepout = 1, or on, produces the independent
variable column. You can specify the independent-
variables in any order.
• indepout= 0 or off (default) does not create an
independent variable column.
You can place the indepout field anywhere, after the ovari
field.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .STIM

2-159
Table 2-3 .STIM Vector File Arguments
Command
Definition
Argument
namei Signal name that you specify.
filename Output file name. If you do not specify a file, HSPICE uses
the input filename.
ovari Output variable that you specify. ovar can only be a node
voltage.
from Keyword; specifies the time to start output of simulation
results. For transient analysis, uses the time units that you
specified.
to Keyword; time to the end output of simulation results. For
transient analysis, uses the specified time units.The from
value can be greater than the to value.
npoints Number of output time points.
indepvar Keyword; specifies dispersed independent-variable points.
You must specify dispersed time points in increasing order.
vth High voltage threshold.
vtl Low voltage threshold.
voh Logic-high voltage for each output signal.
vol Logic-low voltage for each output signal.
ovari Output variable that you specify. ovar can be:
• Node voltage.
• Element current.
• Element templates.
• Parameter string.
For example:
v(1), i(r1), v(2,1), par(’v(1)+v(2)’), LX1(m1), LX2(m1)

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .STIM

2-160
SEE ALSO:
.DOUT
.GRAPH
.MEASURE
.PLOT
.PRINT
.PROBE

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .STIM

2-161
.SUBCKT

SYNTAX:
.SUBCKT subnam n1 <n2 n3 …> <parnam = val>
.ENDS
.SUBCKT <SubName><PinList>[<SubDefaultsList>]
.ENDS

EXAMPLE 1:
*FILE SUB2.SP TEST OF SUBCIRCUITS
.OPTION LIST ACCT
V1 1 0 1
.PARAM P5 = 5 P2 = 10
.SUBCKT SUB1 1 2 P4 = 4
R1 1 0 P4
R2 2 0 P5
X1 1 2 SUB2 P6 = 7
X2 1 2 SUB2
.ENDS
*
.MACRO SUB2 1 2 P6 = 11
R1 1 2 P6
R2 2 0 P2
.EOM
X1 1 2 SUB1 P4 = 6
X2 3 4 SUB1 P6 = 15
X3 3 4 SUB2
*
.MODEL DA D CJA = CAJA CJP = CAJP VRB = -20
IS = 7.62E-18
+ PHI = .5 EXA = .5 EXP = .33
.PARAM CAJA = 2.535E-16 CAJP = 2.53E-16
.END
The preceding example defines two subcircuits: SUB1 and
SUB2. These are resistor divider networks, whose
resistance values are parameters (variables). The X1, X2,

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SUBCKT

2-162
and X3 statements call these subcircuits. Because the
resistor values are different in each call, these three calls
produce different subcircuits.

EXAMPLE 2:
.SUBCKT Inv a y Strength = 3
Mp1 <MosPinList> pMosMod L = 1.2u W = ’Strength * 2u’
Mn1 <MosPinList> nMosMod L = 1.2u W = ’Strength * 1u’
.ENDS
...
xInv0 a y0 Inv$ Default devices: p device = 6u,
$ n device = 3u
xInv1 a y1 Inv Strength = 5$ p device = 10u, n
device = 5u
xInv2 a y2 Inv Strength = 1$ p device = 2u, n
device = 1u
...
This example implements an inverter that uses a Strength
parameter. By default, the inverter can drive three devices.
Enter a new value for the Strength parameter in the element
line, to select larger or smaller inverters for the application.

DESCRIPTION:
You can create a subcircuit description for a commonly-used
circuit, and include one or more references to the subcircuit
in your netlist.
To define a subcircuit in your netlist, use the .SUBCKT
statement.
When you use hierarchical subcircuits, you can pick default
values for circuit elements in a .SUBCKT command. You
can use this feature in cell definitions, to simulate the circuit

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SUBCKT

2-163
 with typical values. Use the .ENDS statement to terminate
a .SUBCKT statement.

Command
Definition
Argument

subnam Specifies a reference name for the subcircuit model call.

n1 … Node numbers for external reference; cannot be the

ground node (zero). Any element nodes that are in the
subcircuit, but are not in this list, are strictly local, with
three exceptions:
• Ground node (zero).
• Nodes assigned using BULK = node in MOSFET or
BJT models.
• Nodes assigned using the .GLOBAL statement.

parnam A parameter name set to a value. Use only in the

subcircuit. To override this value, assign it in the subcircuit
call, or set a value in a .PARAM statement.

SubDefaultsList <SubParam1>=<Expression>
[<SubParam2>=<Expression>...]

SEE ALSO:
.ENDS
.EOM

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .SUBCKT

2-164
.TEMP

SYNTAX:
.TEMP t1 <t2 <t3 ...>>

EXAMPLE 1:
.TEMP -55.0 25.0 125.0
The .TEMP statement sets the circuit temperatures for the
entire circuit simulation. To simulate the circuit, using
individual elements or model temperatures, HSPICE uses:

• Temperature, as set in the .TEMP statement.

• TNOM option setting (or the TREF model parameter).

• DTEMP element temperature.

EXAMPLE 2:
.TEMP 100
D1 N1 N2 DMOD DTEMP=30
D2 NA NC DMOD
R1 NP NN 100 TC1=1 DTEMP=-30
.MODEL DMOD D IS=1E-15 VJ=0.6 CJA=1.2E-13
+ CJP=1.3E-14 TREF=60.0
In this example:
• The .TEMP statement sets the circuit simulation
temperature to 100°C.

• You do not specify TNOM, so it defaults to 25°C.

• The temperature of the diode is 30°C above the circuit

temperature, as set in the DTEMP parameter.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TEMP

2-165
 That is:
• D1temp = 100°C + 30°C = 130°C.
• HSPICE simulates the D2 diode at 100°C.
• R1 simulates at 70°C.
Because the diode model statement specifies TREF at
60°C, HSPICE derates the specified model parameters by:
• 70°C (130°C - 60°C) for the D1 diode.
• 40°C (100°C - 60°C) for the D2 diode.
• 45°C (70°C - TNOM) for the R1 resistor.

DESCRIPTION:
To specify the circuit temperature for an HSPICE simulation,
use the .TEMP statement, or the TEMP parameter in
the .DC, .AC, and .TRAN statements. HSPICE compares
the circuit simulation temperature against the reference
temperature in the TNOM control option. HSPICE uses the
difference between the circuit simulation temperature and
the TNOM reference temperature to define derating factors
for component values.
HSPICE permits only one temperature for the entire circuit.
Multiple definitions of the .TEMP statements in a circuit
behave as a sweep function.
Note: HSPICE allows multiple .TEMP statements in the netlist, and
performs multiple DC, AC or TRAN analyses for each
temperature. Do not set the temperature to the same value
multiple times.

Command
Definition
Argument
t1 t2 Temperatures, in °C, at which HSPICE simulates the circuit.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TEMP

2-166
.TF

SYNTAX:
.TF ov srcnam

EXAMPLE:
.TF V(5,3) VIN
.TF I(VLOAD) VIN
For the first example, HSPICE computes the ratio of V(5,3)
to VIN. This is the ratio of small-signal input resistance at
VIN, to the small-signal output resistance (measured across
nodes 5 and 3). If you specify more than one .TF statement
in a single simulation, HSPICE runs only the last .TF
statement.

DESCRIPTION:
The .TF command calculates DC small-signal values for
transfer functions (ratio of output variable, to input source).
You do not need to specify .OP.
The transfer function statement (.TF) defines small-signal
output and input, for DC small-signal analysis. When you
use the .TF statement, HSPICE computes:

• DC small-signal value of the transfer function (output/

input),.

• Input resistance.
• Output resistance.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TF

2-167
 .

Command
Definition
Argument
ov Small-signal output variable.
srcnam Small-signal input source.

SEE ALSO:
.DC

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TF

2-168
.TITLE

SYNTAX:
.TITLE <string_of_up_to_72_characters>
or
<string_of_up_to_72_characters>

EXAMPLE:
.TITLE my-design_netlist

DESCRIPTION:
You set the simulation title in the first line of the input file.
HSPICE always reads this line, and uses it as the title of the
simulation, regardless of the line’s contents. The simulation
prints the title verbatim, in each section heading of the
output listing file.
To set the title, you can place a .TITLE statement on the first
line of the netlist. However, HSPICE does not require
the .TITLE syntax.
In the second form of the syntax, the string is the first line of
the input file. The first line of the input file is always the
implicit title. If any statement appears as the first line in a file,
simulation interprets it as a title, and does not execute it.
An .ALTER statement does not support using the .TITLE
statement. To change a title for a .ALTER statement, place
the title content in the .ALTER statement itself.
Command
Definition
Argument
string Any character string up to 72 characters long.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TITLE

2-169
.TRAN

SYNTAX:
Single-Point Analysis
.TRAN tincr1 tstop1 <tincr2 tstop2 ...tincrN tstopN>
+ <START = val> <UIC>
Double-Point Analysis
.TRAN tincr1 tstop1 <tincr2 tstop2 ...tincrN tstopN>
+ <START = val> <UIC>
+ <SWEEP var type np pstart pstop>
.TRAN tincr1 tstop1 <tincr2 tstop2 ...tincrN tstopN>
+ <START = val> <UIC>
+ <SWEEP var START="param_expr1"
+ STOP="param_expr2"
+ STEP="param_expr3">
.TRAN tincr1 tstop1 <tincr2 tstop2 ... tincrN tstopN>
+ <START=val> <UIC>
+ <SWEEP var start_expr stop_expr step_expr>
Data-Driven Sweep
.TRAN DATA = datanm
.TRAN tincr1 tstop1 <tincr2 tstop2 ...tincrN tstopN>
+ <START = val> <UIC> <SWEEP DATA = datanm>
.TRAN DATA = datanm<SWEEP var type np pstart pstop>
.TRAN DATA=datanm <SWEEP var START="param_expr1"
+STOP="param_expr2" STEP="param_expr3">
.TRAN DATA=datanm
+ <SWEEP var start_expr stop_expr step_expr>

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TRAN

2-170
Monte Carlo Analysis
.TRAN tincr1 tstop1 <tincr2 tstop2 ...tincrN tstopN>
+ <START = val> <UIC><SWEEP MONTE = val>
Optimization
.TRAN DATA = datanm OPTIMIZE = opt_par_fun
+ RESULTS = measnames MODEL = optmod
.TRAN <DATA=filename> SWEEP OPTIMIZE=OPTxxx
+ RESULTS=ierr1 ... ierrn MODEL=optmod

EXAMPLE 1:
.TRAN 1NS 100NS
This example performs and prints the transient analysis,
every 1 ns, for 100 ns.

EXAMPLE 2:
.TRAN .1NS 25NS 1NS 40NS START = 10NS
This example performs the calculation every 0.1 ns, for the
first 25 ns; and then every 1 ns, until 40 ns. Printing and
plotting begin at 10 ns.

EXAMPLE 3:
.TRAN 10NS 1US UIC
This example performs the calculation every 10 ns, for 1 µs.
This example bypasses the initial DC operating point
calculation. It uses the nodal voltages, specified in the .IC
statement (or by IC parameters in element statements), to
calculate the initial conditions.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TRAN

2-171
 EXAMPLE 4:
.TRAN 10NS 1US UIC SWEEP TEMP -55 75 10
This example increases the temperature by 10 °C, through
the range -55 °C to 75 °C. It also performs transient analysis,
for each temperature.

EXAMPLE 5:
.TRAN 10NS 1US SWEEP load POI 3 1pf 5pf 10pf
This example analyzes each load parameter value, at 1 pF,
5 pF, and 10 pF.

EXAMPLE 6:
.TRAN data = dataname
This example is a data-driven time sweep. It uses a data file
as the sweep input. If the parameters in the data statement
are controlling sources, then a piecewise linear specification
must reference them.

DESCRIPTION:
.TRAN starts a transient analysis, which simulates a circuit
at a specific time.

Command
Definition
Argument
DATA = datanm Data name, referenced in the .TRAN statement.
MONTE = val Produces a specified number (val) of randomly-generated
values. HSPICE uses them to select parameters from a
Gaussian, Uniform, or Random Limit.
np Number of points, or number of points per decade or
octave, depending on what keyword precedes it.
param_expr... Expressions you specify: param_expr1...param_exprN.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TRAN

2-172
Command
Definition
Argument
pincr Voltage, current, element, or model parameter; or any
temperature increment value. If you set the type variation,
use np (number of points), not pincr.
pstart Starting voltage, current, or temperature; or any element or
model parameter value. If you set the type variation to POI
(list of points), use a list of parameter values, instead of
pstart pstop.
pstop Final voltage, current, or temperature; or element or model
parameter value.
START Time when printing or plotting begins. The START
keyword is optional: you can specify a start time without
the keyword.
If you use .TRAN with .MEASURE, a non-zero START
time can cause incorrect .MEASURE results. Do not use
non-zero START times in .TRAN statements, when you
also use .MEASURE.
SWEEP Keyword. Indicates that .TRAN specifies a second sweep.
tincr1… Specifies the printing or plotting increment for printer
output, and the suggested computing increment for post-
processing.
tstop1… Time when a transient analysis stops incrementing by the
first specified time increment (tincr1). If another tincr-tstop
pair follows, analysis continues with a new increment.
UIC Uses the nodal voltages specified in the .IC statement (or
in the IC = parameters of the various element statements)
to calculate initial transient conditions, rather than solving
for the quiescent operating point.
type Specifies any of the following keywords:
• DEC – decade variation.
• OCT – octave variation (the value of the designated
variable is eight times its previous value).
• LIN – linear variation.
• POI – list of points.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TRAN

2-173
 Command
Definition
Argument
var Name of an independent voltage or current source, any
element or model parameter, or the TEMP keyword
(indicating a temperature sweep). You can use a source
value sweep, referring to the source name (SPICE style).
However, if you specify a parameter sweep, a .DATA
statement, and a temperature sweep, you must choose a
parameter name for the source value, and subsequently
refer to it in the .TRAN statement. The parameter name
must not start with V or I.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .TRAN

2-174
.UNPROTECT

SYNTAX:
.UNPROTECT

DESCRIPTION:
In HSPICE, the .UNPROTECT statement restores normal
output functions that a .PROTECT statement restricted.

• Any elements and models located between .PROTECT

and .UNPROTECT statements, inhibit the element and
model listing from the LIST option.
• Neither the .OPTION NODE cross reference, nor
the .OP operating point printout, list any nodes within
the .PROTECT and .UNPROTECT statements.

SEE ALSO:
.PROTECT

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .UNPROTECT

2-175
.VEC

SYNTAX:
.VEC ‘digital_vector_file’

DESCRIPTION:
You can call a digital vector file from an HSPICE netlist. A
digital vector file consists of three parts:

• Vector Pattern Definition section

• Waveform Characteristics section

• Tabular Data section.

The .VEC file must be a text file. If you transfer it between
Unix and Windows, use text mode.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .VEC

2-176
.WIDTH

SYNTAX:
.WIDTH OUT = {80 |132}

EXAMPLE:
.WIDTH OUT = 132 $ SPICE compatible style
.OPTION CO = 132 $ preferred style

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .WIDTH statement to define the print-out width in
HSPICE.
Permissible values for OUT are 80 and 132. You can also
use .OPTION CO to set the OUT value.

Command
Definition
Argument
OUT Output print width.

Commands in HSPICE Netlists: .WIDTH

2-177
Commands in HSPICE Netlists:
2-178
3
Options in HSPICE Netlists 3
The .OPTION command sets a wide variety of HSPICE simulation
options. This chapter describes all of the simulation options that you
can set, using the various forms of the .OPTION command.

All of the options described in this chapter start with .OPTION. For
example, ACCT refers to the .OPTION ACCT command. CO=x
refers to the .OPTION CO=x command, and so forth.

Options in HSPICE Netlists:

3-1
.OPTION

SYNTAX:
.OPTION opt1 <opt2 opt3 ...>

EXAMPLE:
.OPTION BRIEF $ Sets BRIEF to 1 (turns it on)
* Netlist, models,
...
.OPTION BRIEF = 0 $ Turns BRIEF off
This example sets the BRIEF option to 1, to suppress a
printout. It then resets BRIEF to 0 later in the input file, to
resume the printout.

DESCRIPTION:
You can modify various aspects of a Synopsys HSPICE
simulation, including:
• output types

• accuracy

• speed
• convergence
To set control options, use .OPTION statements. You can
set any number of options in one .OPTION statement, and
you can include any number of .OPTION statements in an
input netlist file.
The following pages list all .OPTION command options. The
remainder of this chapter describes these options. For
instructions on how to use options that are relevant to a
specific simulation type, see the appropriate DC, transient,
and AC analysis chapters in the HSPICE Simulation and
Analysis User Guide.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-2
Most options default to 0 (OFF) when you do not assign a
value, using either .OPTION <opt> = <val> or the option
with no assignment: .OPTION <opt>. Each option
description in this section also shows the default value.
To reset options, set them to zero (.OPTION <opt> = 0). To
redefine an option, enter a new .OPTION statement;
HSPICE uses the last definition.

Command
Definition
Argument

opt1 ... Specifies any input control options. Many options are in
the form <opt> = x, where <opt> is the option name and x
is the value assigned to that option. This section
describes all options.

The following .OPTION command options are available:

• General Control Options

• CPU Options
• Interface Options
• Analysis Options
• Error Options
• Version Option

• Model Analysis Options

• DC Opertaing Point, DC Sweep, and Pole/Zero Options

• Transient and AC Small Signal Analysis Options

• Transient Control Options

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-3
 • Input/Output Options
• AC Control Options

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-4
General Control Options
.OPTION ACCT .OPTION NOMOD
.OPTION ACOUT .OPTION NOPAGE
.OPTION ALT999 or ALT9999 .OPTION NOTOP
.OPTION ALTCHK .OPTION NUMDGT
.OPTION BEEP .OPTION NXX
.OPTION BINPRINT .OPTION OPTLST
.OPTION BRIEF .OPTION OPTS
.OPTION CO .OPTION PATHNUM
.OPTION INGOLD .OPTION PLIM
.OPTION LENNAM .OPTION POST_VERSION
.OPTION LIST .OPTION SEARCH
.OPTION MEASDGT .OPTION STATFL
.OPTION NODE .OPTION VERIFY
.OPTION NOELCK

CPU Options
.OPTION CPTIME .OPTION EXPMAX
.OPTION EPSMIN .OPTION LIMTIM

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-5
Interface Options
.OPTION ARTIST .OPTION POST
.OPTION CDS .OPTION PROBE
.OPTION CSDF .OPTION PSF
.OPTION DLENCSDF .OPTION SDA
.OPTION MEASOUT .OPTION ZUKEN
.OPTION MENTOR
.OPTION MONTECON

Analysis Options
.OPTION ASPEC .OPTION PARHIER
.OPTION FFTOUT .OPTION SEED
.OPTION LIMPTS .OPTION SPICE

Error Options
.OPTION BADCHR .OPTION NOWARN
.OPTION DIAGNOSTIC .OPTION WARNLIMIT

Version Option
.OPTION H9007

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-6
Model Analysis Options

General Model Analysis Options

.OPTION DCAP .OPTION MODMONTE
.OPTION MODSRH .OPTION TNOM
.OPTION SCALE .OPTION XDTEMP
.OPTION HIER_SCALE

MOSFET Model Analysis Options

.OPTION CVTOL .OPTION DEFPD
.OPTION DEFAD .OPTION DEFPS
.OPTION DEFAS .OPTION DEFW
.OPTION DEFL .OPTION SCALM
.OPTION DEFNRD .OPTION WL
.OPTION DEFNRS

Inductor Model Analysis Options

.OPTION GENK .OPTION KLIM

BJT and Diode Model Analysis Options

.OPTION EXPLI

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-7
DC Opertaing Point, DC Sweep, and Pole/Zero Options

DC Accuracy Options
.OPTION ABSH .OPTION MAXAMP
.OPTION ABSI .OPTION RELH
.OPTION ABSMOS .OPTION RELI
.OPTION ABSTOL .OPTION RELMOS
.OPTION ABSVDC .OPTION RELV
.OPTION DI .OPTION RELVDC
.OPTION KCLTEST

DC Matrix Options
.OPTION ITL1 .OPTION PIVREF
.OPTION ITL2 .OPTION PIVREL
.OPTION NOPIV .OPTION PIVTOL
.OPTION PIVOT .OPTION SPARSE

DC Pole/Zero I/O Options

.OPTION CAPTAB .OPTION VFLOOR
.OPTION DCCAP

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-8
DC Convergence Options
.OPTION CONVERGE .OPTION GMINDC
.OPTION CSHDC .OPTION GRAMP
.OPTION DCFOR .OPTION GSHUNT
.OPTION DCHOLD .OPTION ICSWEEP
.OPTION DCSTEP .OPTION ITLPTRAN
.OPTION DCON .OPTION NEWTOL
.OPTION DCTRAN .OPTION OFF
.OPTION DV .OPTION RESMIN
.OPTION GMAX

DC Initialization Control Options

.OPTION ABSTOL .OPTION ITL1
.OPTION CAPTAB .OPTION ITL2
.OPTION CSHDC .OPTION KCLTEST
.OPTION DCCAP .OPTION MAXAMP
.OPTION DCFOR .OPTION NEWTOL
.OPTION DCHOLD .OPTION NOPIV
.OPTION DCSTEP .OPTION OFF
.OPTION DV .OPTION PIVOT
.OPTION GRAMP .OPTION PIVREF
.OPTION GSHUNT .OPTION PIVTOL
.OPTION ICSWEEP .OPTION RESMIN
.OPTION ITLPTRAN .OPTION SPARSE

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-9
Transient and AC Small Signal Analysis Options

Transient/AC Accuracy Options

.OPTION ABSH .OPTION MAXAMP
.OPTION ABSV .OPTION RELH
.OPTION ACCURATE .OPTION RELI
.OPTION ACOUT .OPTION RELQ
.OPTION CHGTOL .OPTION RELTOL
.OPTION CSHUNT .OPTION RELV
.OPTION DI .OPTION RISETIME
.OPTION GMIN .OPTION TRTOL
.OPTION GSHUNT .OPTION VNTOL

Transient/AC Speed Options

.OPTION AUTOSTOP .OPTION FAST
.OPTION BKPSIZ .OPTION ITLPZ
.OPTION BYPASS .OPTION MBYPASS
.OPTION BYTOL

Transient/AC Timestep Options

.OPTION ABSVAR .OPTION IMIN
.OPTION DELMAX .OPTION ITL3
.OPTION DVDT .OPTION ITL4
.OPTION FS .OPTION ITL5
.OPTION FT .OPTION TIMERES
.OPTION IMAX

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-10
 Transient/AC Algorithm Options
.OPTION DVTR .OPTION LVLTIM
.OPTION IMAX .OPTION MAXORD
.OPTION IMIN .OPTION METHOD
.OPTION ITL3 .OPTION MU
.OPTION ITL4 .OPTION PURETP
.OPTION ITL5 .OPTION TRCON

.BIASCHK Options
.OPTION BIASFILE .OPTION BIAWARN

Transient Control Options

Transient Control Method Options

.OPTION BYPASS .OPTION ITRPRT
.OPTION CSHUNT .OPTION MAXORD
.OPTION DVDT .OPTION METHOD
.OPTION GSHUNT .OPTION TRCON
.OPTION INTERP

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-11
 Transient Control Tolerance Options
.OPTION ABSH .OPTION RELH
.OPTION ABSV .OPTION RELI
.OPTION ABSVAR .OPTION RELQ
.OPTION ACCURATE .OPTION RELTOL
.OPTION BYTOL .OPTION RELV
.OPTION CHGTOL .OPTION RELVAR
.OPTION DI .OPTION SLOPETOL
.OPTION FAST .OPTION TIMERES
.OPTION MAXAMP .OPTION TRTOL
.OPTION MBYPASS .OPTION VNTOL
.OPTION MU

Transient Control Limit Options

.OPTION AUTOSTOP .OPTION IMIN
.OPTION BKPSIZ .OPTION ITL3
.OPTION DELMAX .OPTION ITL4
.OPTION DVTR .OPTION ITL5
.OPTION FS .OPTION RMAX
.OPTION FT .OPTION RMIN
.OPTION GMIN .OPTION VFLOOR
.OPTION IMAX

Transient Control Matrix Options

.OPTION GMIN .OPTION PIVOT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-12
 Iteration Count Dynamic Timestep Options
.OPTION IMAX .OPTION IMIN

Input/Output Options
.OPTION INTERP .OPTION MEASSORT
.OPTION ITRPRT .OPTION PUTMEAS
.OPTION MEASFAIL .OPTION UNWRAP

AC Control Options
.OPTION ABSH .OPTION MAXAMP
.OPTION ACOUT .OPTION RELH
.OPTION DI .OPTION UNWRAP

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION

3-13
.OPTION ABSH

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ABSH=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the absolute current change, through voltage-defined
branches (voltage sources and inductors). Use ABSH with
DI and RELH, to check for current convergence. The default
is 0.0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ABSH

3-14
.OPTION ABSI

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ABSI=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the absolute error tolerance for branch currents, in
diodes, BJTs, and JFETs, during DC and transient analysis.
Decrease ABSI, if accuracy is more important than
convergence time.
To analyze currents less than 1 nanoamp, change ABSI to a
value at least two orders of magnitude smaller than the
minimum expected current.
The default is 1e-9 for KCLTEST = 0, or 1e-6 for
KCLTEST = 1.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ABSI

3-15
.OPTION ABSMOS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ABSMOS=x

DESCRIPTION:
Current error tolerance (for MOSFET devices), in DC or
transient analysis. The ABSMOS setting determines
whether the drain-to-source current solution has converged.
The drain-to-source current converged if:

• The difference between the drain-to-source current in the

last iteration, versus the present iteration, is less than
ABSMOS, or
• This difference is greater than ABSMOS, but the percent
change is less than RELMOS.
If other accuracy tolerances also indicate convergence,
HSPICE solves the circuit at that timepoint, and calculates
the next timepoint solution. For low-power circuits,
optimization, and single transistor simulations, set
ABSMOS = 1e-12. Default is 1e-6 (amperes).

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ABSMOS

3-16
.OPTION ABSTOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ABSTOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the absolute error tolerance for branch currents, for DC
and transient analysis. Decrease ABSTOL, if accuracy is
more important than convergence time. ABSTOL is the
same as ABSI.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ABSI

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ABSTOL

3-17
.OPTION ABSV

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ABSV=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets absolute minimum voltage for DC and transient
analysis. ABSV is the same as VNTOL. If accuracy is more
critical than convergence, decrease ABSV. If you need
voltages less than 50 microvolts, reduce ABSV to two orders
of magnitude less than the smallest desired voltage. This
ensures at least two significant digits. Typically, you do not
need to change ABSV, except to simulate a high-voltage
circuit. A reasonable value for 1000-volt circuits is 5 to 50
millivolts. The default is 50 (microvolts).

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ABSV

3-18
.OPTION ABSVAR

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ABSVAR=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the absolute limit for the maximum voltage change,
from one time point to the next. Use this option with the
DVDT algorithm. If the simulator produces a convergent
solution that is greater than ABSVAR, then HSPICE
discards the solution, sets the timestep to a smaller value,
and recalculates the solution. This is called a timestep
reversal. The default=0.5 (volts).

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ABSVAR

3-19
.OPTION ABSVDC

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ABSVDC=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the minimum voltage, for DC and transient analysis. If
accuracy is more critical than convergence, decrease
ABSVDC. If you need voltages less than 50 micro-volts,
reduce ABSVDC, to two orders of magnitude less than the
smallest voltage. This ensures at least two digits of
significance. Typically, you do not need to change ABSVDC,
unless you simulate a high-voltage circuit. For 1000-volt
circuits, a reasonable value is 5 to 50 millivolts.
The default=VNTOL (VNTOL default = 50 mV).

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION VNTOL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ABSVDC

3-20
.OPTION ACCT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ACCT
.OPTION ACCT=[1|2]

EXAMPLE:
.OPTION ACCT=2

DESCRIPTION:
The ACCT option in HSPICE generates a detailed
accounting report.

Value Description

.OPTION ACCT Enables reporting.

.OPTION ACCT = 1 (default) Is the same as ACCT, without arguments.

.OPTION ACCT = 2 Enables reporting, and matrix statistic

reporting.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ACCT

3-21
.OPTION ACCURATE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ACCURATE=x

DESCRIPTION:
Selects a time algorithm that uses LVLTIM = 3 and
DVDT = 2, for circuits such as high-gain comparators. Use
this option with circuits that combine high gain and large
dynamic range, to guarantee accurate solutions in HSPICE.
When set to 1, ACCURATE sets these control options:

• LVLTIM = 3

• DVDT = 2
• RELVAR = 0.2
• ABSVAR = 0.2

• FT = 0.2
• RELMOS = 0.01

The default is 0.
SEE ALSO:
.OPTION DVDT
.OPTION LVLTIM

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ACCURATE

3-22
.OPTION ACOUT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ACOUT=x

DESCRIPTION:
AC output calculation method, for the difference in values of
magnitude, phase, and decibels. Use these values for prints
and plots. The default is 1.
The default (ACOUT = 1) selects the HSPICE method,
which calculates the difference of the magnitudes of the
values. The SPICE method, ACOUT = 0, calculates the
magnitude of the differences in HSPICE.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ACOUT

3-23
.OPTION ALT999 or ALT9999

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ALT999
.OPTION ALT9999

DESCRIPTION:
This option was developed to allow the.GRAPH statement
to create more output files when you ran .ALTER
simulations.
This option is obsolete starting with version 2003.09.
Without this option, HSPICE can now generate up to 10,000
unique files.

SEE ALSO:
.ALTER
.GRAPH

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ALT999 or ALT9999

3-24
.OPTION ALTCHK

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ALTCHK=x

DESCRIPTION:
By default, HSPICE automatically reports topology errors in
the latest elements, in your top-level netlist. It also reports
errors in elements that you redefine, using the .ALTER
statement (altered netlist).
To disable topology checking in redefined elements (that is,
to check topology only in the top-level netlist, but not in the
altered netlist), set:
.option altchk=0
By default, .OPTION ALTCHK is set to 1:
.option altchk=1
.option altchk
This enables topology checking, in elements that you
redefine using the .ALTER statement.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ALTCHK

3-25
.OPTION ASPEC

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ASPEC=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets HSPICE to ASPEC-compatibility mode. When you set
this option, the simulator reads ASPEC models and netlists,
and the results are compatible. Default is 0 (HSPICE mode).
If you set ASPEC, the following model parameters default to
ASPEC values:

• ACM = 1: Changes the default values for CJ, IS, NSUB,

TOX, U0, and UTRA.

• Diode Model: TLEV = 1 affects temperature

compensation for PB.
• MOSFET Model: TLEV = 1 affects PB, PHB, VTO, and
PHI.

• SCALM, SCALE: Sets the model scale factor to microns,

for length dimensions.
• WL: Reverses implicit order for stating width and length
in a MOSFET statement. The default (WL = 0) assigns
the length first, then the width.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION SCALE
.OPTION SCALM
.OPTION WL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ASPEC

3-26
.OPTION ARTIST

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ARTIST=x

DESCRIPTION:
ARTIST = 2 enables the Cadence Analog Artist interface.
This option requires a specific license. Supported on Sun
Solaris 2.5/2.7/2.8, HPUX 10.20 and 11.20, IBM AIX 4.3
platforms only. This option is not available on the PC
RedHat/Linux 7.2 platforms.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ARTIST

3-27
.OPTION AUTOSTOP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION AUTOSTOP

DESCRIPTION:
Stops a transient analysis in HSPICE, after calculating all
TRIG-TARG, FIND-WHEN, and FROM-TO measure
functions. This option can substantially reduce CPU time.
You can use the AUTOSTOP option with any measure type.
You can also use the result of the preceding measurement,
as the next measured parameter.
Also terminates the simulation, after completing
all .MEASURE statements. This is of special interest, when
testing corners.

SEE ALSO:
.MEASURE

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION AUTOSTOP

3-28
.OPTION BADCHR

SYNTAX:
.OPTION BADCHR

DESCRIPTION:
Generates a warning, if it finds a non-printable character in
an input file.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION BADCHR

3-29
.OPTION BEEP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION BEEP=x

DESCRIPTION:
BEEP=1 sounds an audible tone when simulation returns a
message, such as info: hspice job completed.
BEEP=0 turns off the audible tone.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION BEEP

3-30
.OPTION BIASFILE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION BIASFILE=x

EXAMPLE:
OPTION BIASFILE=’biaschk/mos.bias’

DESCRIPTION:
If you use this option, HSPICE outputs the results of
all .BIASCHK commands to a file that you specify. If you do
not set this option, HSPICE outputs the .BIASCHK results to
the *.lis file.

SEE ALSO:
.BIASCHK

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION BIASFILE

3-31
.OPTION BIAWARN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION BIAWARN=x

EXAMPLE:
.OPTION BIAWARN=1

DESCRIPTION:
For the BIAWARN option:

• If you set this option to 1, HSPICE immediately outputs a

warning message, when any local max bias voltage
exceeds the limit during transient analysis. After this
transient analysis, HSPICE outputs the results summary,
as filtered by noise.

• If you set this option to 0 (the default), HSPICE does not

output a warning message during transient analysis.
HSPICE outputs the results, after this transient analysis.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION BIAWARN

3-32
.OPTION BINPRINT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION BINPRINT

DESCRIPTION:
Outputs the binning parameters of the CMI MOSFET model.
Currently available only for Level 57.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION BINPRINT

3-33
.OPTION BKPSIZ

SYNTAX:
.OPTION BKPSIZ=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the size of the breakpoint table. The default is 5000.
This is an old option, provided only for backward-
compatibility.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION BKPSIZ

3-34
.OPTION BRIEF

SYNTAX:
.OPTION BRIEF=x

DESCRIPTION:
Stops printback of the data file, until HSPICE finds
an .OPTION BRIEF = 0, or the .END statement. It also
resets the LIST, NODE, and OPTS options, and sets
NOMOD. BRIEF = 0 enables printback. The NXX option is
the same as BRIEF.

SEE ALSO:
.END

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION BRIEF

3-35
.OPTION BYPASS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION BYPASS=x

DESCRIPTION:
Bypasses model evaluations, if the terminal voltages do not
change. Can be 0 (off) or 1 (on). To speed-up simulation, this
option does not update the status of latent devices. To
enable bypassing, set .OPTION BYPASS = 1, for
MOSFETs, MESFETs, JFETs, BJTs, or diodes. Default = 1.
Use the BYPASS algorithm cautiously. Some circuit types
might not converge, and might lose accuracy in transient
analysis and operating-point calculations.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION BYPASS

3-36
.OPTION BYTOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION BYTOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Specifies a voltage tolerance, at which a MOSFET,
MESFET, JFET, BJT, or diode becomes latent. HSPICE
does not update status of latent devices. The
default = MBYPASS x VNTOL.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION MBYPASS
.OPTION VNTOL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION BYTOL

3-37
.OPTION CAPTAB

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CAPTAB

DESCRIPTION:
Prints table of single-plate node capacitances, for diodes,
BJTs, MOSFETs, JFETs, and passive capacitors, at each
operating point.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CAPTAB

3-38
.OPTION CDS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CDS=x

DESCRIPTION:
CDS = 2 produces a Cadence WSF (ASCII format) post-
analysis file, for Opus. This option requires a specific
license. The CDS option is the same as the SDA option.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CDS

3-39
.OPTION CHGTOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CHGTOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets a charge error tolerance, if you set LVLTIM = 2. Use
CHGTOL with RELQ to set the absolute and relative charge
tolerance for all HSPICE capacitances. The default=1e-15
(coulomb).

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION CHGTOL
.OPTION LVLTIM
.OPTION RELQ

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CHGTOL

3-40
.OPTION CO

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CO=<column_width>

EXAMPLE:
* Narrow print-out (default)
.OPTION CO=80
* Wide print-out
.OPTION CO=132

DESCRIPTION:
The number of output variables that print on a single line of
output, is a function of the number of columns. Use
.OPTION CO to set the column width for print-outs in
HSPICE.
You can set up to five output variables per 80-column output,
and up to eight output variables per 132-column output, with
twelve characters per column. HSPICE automatically
creates additional print statements and tables, for all output
variables beyond the number that the CO option specifies.
The default is 80.
Command
Definition
Argument

column_width The number of characters in a single line of output.

SEE ALSO:
.WIDTH

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CO

3-41
.OPTION CONVERGE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CONVERGE=x

DESCRIPTION:
Invokes different methods to solve non-convergence
problems.

• CONVERGE = -1 : Use with DCON = -1, to disable

autoconvergence.

• CONVERGE = 0 : Autoconvergence (default).

• CONVERGE = 1 : Uses the Damped Pseudo Transient
algorithm. If simulation does not converge within the set
CPU time (in the CPTIME control option), then simulation
halts.

• CONVERGE = 2 : Uses a combination of DCSTEP and

GMINDC ramping. Not used in the autoconvergence
flow.
• CONVERGE = 3 : Invokes the source-stepping method.
Not used in the autoconvergence flow.
• CONVERGE = 4 : Uses the gmath ramping method.

Even you did not set it in an .OPTION statement, the

CONVERGE option activates if a matrix floating-point
overflows, or if HSPICE reports a timestep too small error.
Default = 0.
If a matrix floating-point overflows, then CONVERGE = 1.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CONVERGE

3-42
.OPTION CPTIME

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CPTIME=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the maximum CPU time, in seconds, allotted for this
simulation job. When the time allowed for the job exceeds
CPTIME, HSPICE prints or plots the results up to that point,
and concludes the job. Use this option if you are uncertain
how long the simulation will take, especially when you debug
new data files. Also see LIMTIM. Default is 1e7 (400 days).

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CPTIME

3-43
.OPTION CSDF

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CSDF=x

DESCRIPTION:
Selects Common Simulation Data Format (Viewlogic-
compatible graph data file format).

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CSDF

3-44
.OPTION CSHDC

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CSHDC=x

DESCRIPTION:
The same option as CSHUNT; use only with the
CONVERGE option.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION CONVERGE
.OPTION CSHUNT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CSHDC

3-45
.OPTION CSHUNT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CSHUNT=x

DESCRIPTION:
Capacitance added from each node to ground, in HSPICE.
Add a small CSHUNT to each node, to solve internal
timestep too small problems, caused by high-frequency
oscillations or numerical noise. The default=0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CSHUNT

3-46
.OPTION CVTOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CVTOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Changes the number of numerical integration steps, when
calculating the gate capacitor charge for a MOSFET, using
CAPOP = 3. See the discussion of CAPOP = 3 in the
“Overview of MOSFETS” chapter of the HSPICE Elements
and Device Models Manual, for explicit equations and
discussion.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION CVTOL

3-47
.OPTION D_IBIS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION D_IBIS=’ibis_files_directory’

EXAMPLE:
.OPTION d_ibis='/home/user/ibis/models'

DESCRIPTION:
The .OPTION D_IBIS option specifies the directory
containing the IBIS files. If you specify several directories,
then the simulation looks for IBIS files in the local directory
(the directory from which you run the simulation). It then
checks the directories specified through .OPTION D_IBIS in
the order that .OPTION cards appear in the netlist. You can
use the D_IBIS option to specify up to four directories.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION D_IBIS

3-48
.OPTION DCAP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DCAP

DESCRIPTION:
Selects equations, which HSPICE uses to calculate
depletion capacitance for Level 1 and 3 diodes, and BJTs.
The HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual
describes these equations.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DCAP

3-49
.OPTION DCCAP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DCCAP=x

DESCRIPTION:
Generates C-V plots. Prints capacitance values of a circuit
(both model and element), during a DC analysis. You can
use a DC sweep of the capacitor, to generate C-V plots.
Default = 0 (off).

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DCCAP

3-50
.OPTION DCFOR

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DCFOR=x

DESCRIPTION:
Use with .OPTION DCHOLD and the .NODESET
statement, to enhance DC convergence.
DCFOR sets the number of iterations to calculate, after a
circuit converges in the steady state. The number of
iterations after convergence is usually zero, so DCFOR
adds iterations (and computation time) to the DC circuit
solution. DCFOR ensures that a circuit actually, not falsely,
converges. The default is 0.

SEE ALSO:
.NODESET
.OPTION DCHOLD

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DCFOR

3-51
.OPTION DCHOLD

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DCHOLD=x

DESCRIPTION:
Use DCFOR and DCHOLD together, to initialize DC
analysis. DCFOR and DCHOLD enhance the convergence
properties of a DC simulation. DCFOR and DCHOLD work
with the .NODESET statement. Default is 1.
DCHOLD specifies how many iterations to hold a node, at
the .NODESET voltage values. The effects of DCHOLD on
convergence differ, according to the DCHOLD value, and
the number of iterations before DC convergence.
If a circuit converges in the steady state, in fewer than
DCHOLD iterations, the DC solution includes the values set
in .NODESET.
If a circuit requires more than DCHOLD iterations to
converge, HSPICE ignores the values set in the .NODESET
statement, and calculates the DC solution, using
the .NODESET fixed-source voltages open circuited.

SEE ALSO:
.NODESET
.OPTION DCFOR

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DCHOLD

3-52
.OPTION DCON

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DCON=x

DESCRIPTION:
If a circuit cannot converge, HSPICE automatically sets
DCON = 1, and calculates the following:
V max
DV = max æè 0.1, ----------------öø , if DV = 1000
50
Imax
GRAMP = max æè 6, log10 æè --------------------------öø öø ITL1 = ITL1 + 20 ⋅ GRAMP
GMINDC
Vmax is the maximum voltage, and Imax is the maximum
current.
• If the circuit still cannot converge, HSPICE sets
DCON = 2, which sets DV = 1e6.

• If the circuit uses discontinuous models or uninitialized

flip-flops, simulation might not converge. Set DCON = -1
and CONVERGE = -1, to disable autoconvergence.
HSPICE lists all non-convergent nodes and devices.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION CONVERGE

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DCON

3-53
.OPTION DCSTEP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DCSTEP=x

DESCRIPTION:
Converts DC model and element capacitors to a
conductance, to enhance DC convergence properties.
HSPICE divides the value of the element capacitors by
DCSTEP, to model DC conductance. The default is 0
(seconds).

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DCSTEP

3-54
.OPTION DCTRAN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DCTRAN=x

DESCRIPTION:
Invokes different methods to solve non-convergence
problems. DCTRAN is an alias for CONVERGE.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION CONVERGE

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DCTRAN

3-55
.OPTION DEFAD

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DEFAD=x

DESCRIPTION:
The default MOSFET drain diode area in HSPICE. The
default=0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DEFAD

3-56
.OPTION DEFAS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DEFAS=x

DESCRIPTION:
The default MOSFET source diode area in HSPICE. The
default=0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DEFAS

3-57
.OPTION DEFL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DEFL=x

DESCRIPTION:
The default MOSFET channel length in HSPICE. The
default=1e-4m.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DEFL

3-58
.OPTION DEFNRD

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DEFNRD=x

DESCRIPTION:
The default number of squares for the drain resistor on a
MOSFET. The default is 0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DEFNRD

3-59
.OPTION DEFNRS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DEFNRS=x

DESCRIPTION:
The default number of squares for the source resistor on a
MOSFET. The default is 0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DEFNRS

3-60
.OPTION DEFPD

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DEFPD=x

DESCRIPTION:
The default MOSFET drain diode perimeter in HSPICE. The
default is 0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DEFPD

3-61
.OPTION DEFPS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DEFPS=x

DESCRIPTION:
The default MOSFET source diode perimeter in HSPICE.
The default is 0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DEFPS

3-62
.OPTION DEFW

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DEFW=x

DESCRIPTION:
The default MOSFET channel width in HSPICE. The default
is 1e-4m.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DEFW

3-63
.OPTION DELMAX

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DELMAX=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the maximum Delta of the internal timestep. HSPICE
automatically sets the DELMAX value, based on timestep
control factors. The initial DELMAX value, shown in the
HSPICE output listing, is generally not the value used for
simulation.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DELMAX

3-64
.OPTION DI

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DI=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the maximum iteration-to-iteration current change,
through voltage-defined branches (voltage sources and
inductors). Use this option only if the value of the ABSH
control option is greater than 0. The default is 0.0.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ABSH

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DI

3-65
.OPTION DIAGNOSTIC

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DIAGNOSTIC

DESCRIPTION:
Logs the occurrence of negative model conductances.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DIAGNOSTIC

3-66
.OPTION DLENCSDF

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DLENCSDF=x

DESCRIPTION:
If you use the Common Simulation Data Format (Viewlogic
graph data file format) as the output format, this digit length
option specifies how many digits to include, in scientific
notation (exponents), or to the right of the decimal point.
Valid values are any integer from 1 to 10, and the default is
5.
If you assign a floating decimal point, or if you specify less
than 1 or more than 10 digits, HSPICE uses the default. For
example, it places 5 digits to the right of a decimal point.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DLENCSDF

3-67
.OPTION DV

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DV=x

DESCRIPTION:
Maximum iteration-to-iteration voltage change, for all circuit
nodes, in both DC and transient analysis. High-gain bipolar
amplifiers can require values of 0.5 to 5.0, to achieve a
stable DC operating point. Large CMOS digital circuits
frequently require about 1 volt. The default is 1000 (or 1e6 if
DCON = 2).

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DV

3-68
.OPTION DVDT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DVDT=x

DESCRIPTION:
Adjusts the timestep, based on rates of change for node
voltage. The default is 4.

• 0 - original algorithm
• 1 - fast

• 2 - accurate
• 3,4 - balance speed and accuracy

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DVDT

3-69
.OPTION DVTR

SYNTAX:
.OPTION DVTR=x

DESCRIPTION:
Limits voltage in transient analysis. The default is 1000.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION DVTR

3-70
.OPTION EPSMIN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION EPSMIN=x

DESCRIPTION:
Specifies the smallest number that a computer can add or
subtract, a constant value. Default is 1e-28.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION EPSMIN

3-71
.OPTION EXPLI

SYNTAX:
.OPTION EXPLI=x

DESCRIPTION:
Current-explosion model parameter. PN junction
characteristics, above the explosion current, are linear.
HSPICE determines the slope at the explosion point. This
improves simulation speed and convergence.
The default is 0.0 amp/AREAeff.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION EXPLI

3-72
.OPTION EXPMAX

SYNTAX:
.OPTION EXPMAX=x

DESCRIPTION:
Specifies the largest exponent that you can use for an
exponential, before overflow occurs. Typical value for an
IBM platform is 350.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION EXPMAX

3-73
.OPTION FAST

SYNTAX:
.OPTION FAST

DESCRIPTION:
Sets additional options, which increase simulation speed,
with minimal loss of accuracy.
To speed-up simulation, this option does not update the
status of latent devices. Use this option for MOSFETs,
MESFETs, JFETs, BJTs, and diodes. Default is 0.
A device is latent, if its node voltage variation (from one
iteration to the next) is less than the value of either the
BYTOL control option, or the BYPASSTOL element
parameter. (If FAST is on, HSPICE sets BYTOL to different
values, for different types of device models.)
Besides the FAST option, you can also use the NOTOP and
NOELCK options, to reduce input pre-processing time.
Increasing the value of the MBYPASS or BYTOL option, also
helps simulations to run faster, but can reduce accuracy.
SEE ALSO:
.OPTION BYTOL
.OPTION MBYPASS
.OPTION NOELCK
.OPTION NOTOP

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION FAST

3-74
.OPTION FFTOUT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION FFTOUT=x

DESCRIPTION:
Prints 30 harmonic fundamentals, sorted by size, THD,
SNR, and SFDR, but only if you specify a .OPTION
FFTOUT statement and a .FFT freq=xxx statement.

SEE ALSO:
.FFT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION FFTOUT

3-75
.OPTION FS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION FS=x

DESCRIPTION:
Decreases Delta (internal timestep) by the specified fraction
of a timestep (TSTEP), for the first time point of a transient.
Decrease the FS value to help circuits that have timestep
convergence difficulties. DVDT = 3 uses FS to control the
timestep.
Delta = FS ¥ [ MIN ( TSTEP, DELMAX, BKPT ) ]

• You specify DELMAX.

• BKPT is related to the breakpoint of the source.

• The .TRAN statement sets TSTEP. Default = 0.25.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION DVDT
.TRAN

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION FS

3-76
.OPTION FT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION FT=x

DESCRIPTION:
Decreases Delta (the internal timestep), by a specified
fraction of a timestep (TSTEP), for an iteration set that does
not converge. If DVDT = 2 or DVDT = 4, FT controls the
timestep. The default = 0.25.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION DVDT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION FT

3-77
.OPTION GENK

SYNTAX:
.OPTION GENK=x

DESCRIPTION:
Automatically computes second-order mutual inductance,
for several coupled inductors. The default=1, which enables
the calculation.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION GENK

3-78
.OPTION GMAX

SYNTAX:
.OPTION GMAX=x

DESCRIPTION:
Conductance, in parallel with a current source, for .IC and
.NODESET initialization circuitry. Some large bipolar circuits
require you to set GMAX=1, for convergence. The
default=100 (mho).

SEE ALSO:
.IC
.NODESET

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION GMAX

3-79
.OPTION GMIN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION GMIN=x

DESCRIPTION:
Minimum conductance added to all PN junctions, for a time
sweep in transient analysis. The default is 1e-12.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION GMIN

3-80
.OPTION GMINDC

SYNTAX:
.OPTION GMINDC=x

DESCRIPTION:
Conductance in parallel to all pn junctions and MOSFET
nodes except gate, for DC analysis. GMINDC helps
overcome DC convergence problems, caused by low values
of off-conductance, for pn junctions and MOSFETs. You can
use GRAMP to reduce GMINDC, by one order of magnitude,
for each step. Set GMINDC between 1e-4 and the PIVTOL
value. The default is 1e-12.
Large values of GMINDC can cause unreasonable circuit
response. If your circuit requires large values to converge,
suspect a bad model or circuit. If a matrix floating-point
overflows, and if GMINDC is 1.0e-12 or less, HSPICE sets it
to 1.0e-11. HSPICE manipulates GMINDC in auto-converge
mode.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION PIVTOL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION GMINDC

3-81
.OPTION GRAMP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION GRAMP=x

DESCRIPTION:
HSPICE sets this value during auto-convergence
(default=0). Use GRAMP, with the GMINDC option, to find
the smallest GMINDC value that results in DC convergence.
GRAMP specifies a conductance range, over which DC
operating point analysis sweeps GMINDC. HSPICE
replaces GMINDC values over this range, simulates each
value, and uses the lowest GMINDC value where the circuit
converges in a steady state.
If you sweep GMINDC between 1e-12 mhos (default) and
1e-6 mhos, GRAMP is 6 (value of the exponent difference,
between the default and the maximum conductance limit). In
this example:
• HSPICE first sets GMINDC to 1e-6 mhos, and simulates
the circuit.

• If circuit simulation converges, HSPICE sets GMINDC to

1e-7 mhos, and simulates the circuit.

• The sweep continues until HSPICE simulates all values

of the GRAMP ramp.
If the combined GMINDC and GRAMP conductance is
greater than 1e-3 mho, false convergence can occur.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION GMINDC

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION GRAMP

3-82
.OPTION GSHUNT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION GSHUNT=x

DESCRIPTION:
Conductance, added from each node to ground. Default is
zero. Add a small GSHUNT to each node, to help solve
Timestep too small problems, caused by either high-
frequency oscillations or numerical noise.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION GSHUNT

3-83
.OPTION H9007

SYNTAX:
.OPTION H9007

DESCRIPTION:
Sets default values for general-control options, to
correspond to values for HSPICE H9007D. If you set this
option, HSPICE does not use the EXPLI model parameter.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION EXPLI

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION H9007

3-84
.OPTION HIER_SCALE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION HIER_SCALE=x

DESCRIPTION:
If you set the HIER_SCALE option, you can use the S
parameter to scale sub-circuits.

• 0 interprets S as a user-defined parameter.

• 1 interprets S as a scale parameter.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION HIER_SCALE

3-85
.OPTION ICSWEEP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ICSWEEP=x

DESCRIPTION:
Saves the current analysis result of a parameter or
temperature sweep, as the starting point in the next analysis
in the sweep.

• If ICSWEEP = 1 (default), the next analysis uses the

current results.
• If ICSWEEP = 0, the next analysis does not use the
results of the current analysis.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ICSWEEP

3-86
.OPTION IMAX

SYNTAX:
.OPTION IMAX=x

DESCRIPTION:
Maximum timestep, in timestep algorithms for transient
analysis. IMAX sets the maximum iterations, to obtain a
convergent solution at a timepoint. If the number of iterations
needed is greater than IMAX, the internal timestep (Delta)
decreases, by a factor equal to the FT transient control
option. HSPICE uses the new timestep to calculate a new
solution. IMAX also works with the IMIN transient control
option. IMAX is the same as ITL4. The default is 8.0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION IMAX

3-87
.OPTION IMIN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION IMIN=x

DESCRIPTION:
Minimum timestep, in timestep algorithms for transient
analysis. IMIN is the minimum number of iterations required,
to obtain convergence. If the number of iterations is less
than IMIN, the internal timestep (Delta) doubles.
Use this option to decrease simulation times, in circuits
where the nodes are stable most of the time (such as digital
circuits). If the number of iterations is greater than IMIN, the
timestep stays the same, unless the timestep exceeds the
IMAX option. IMIN is the same as ITL3. The default is 3.0.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION IMAX

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION IMIN

3-88
.OPTION INGOLD

SYNTAX:
.OPTION INGOLD=[0|1|2]

EXAMPLE:
.OPTION INGOLD=2

DESCRIPTION:
By default, HSPICE prints variable values in engineering
notation:
F = 1e-15 M = 1e-3
P = 1e-12 K = 1e3
N = 1e-9 X = 1e6
U = 1e-6 G = 1e9
In contrast to exponential form, engineering notation
provides two to three extra significant digits, and aligns
columns to facilitate comparison. To obtain output in
exponential form, specify .OPTION INGOLD = 1 or 2.

Value Description Defaults

INGOLD = 0 Engineering Format 1.234K

(default) 123M

INGOLD = 1 G Format (fixed and exponential) 1.234e+03

.123

INGOLD = 2 E Format (exponential SPICE) 1.234e+03

.123e-1

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION MEASDGT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION INGOLD

3-89
.OPTION INTERP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION INTERP=x

DESCRIPTION:
Limits output for post-analysis tools, such as Cadence or
Zuken, to only the .TRAN timestep intervals. By default,
HSPICE outputs all convergent iterations. INTERP typically
produces a much smaller design .tr# file.
Use INTERP = 1 with caution, when the netlist includes
.MEASURE statements. To compute measure statements,
HSPICE uses the post-processing output. Reducing post-
processing output can lead to interpolation errors, in
measure results.
When you run data-driven transient analysis (.TRAN DATA)
in an optimization routine, HSPICE forces INTERP to 1. All
measurement results are at the time points specified in the
data-driven sweep. To measure only at converged internal
timesteps (for example, to calculate the AVG or RMS), set
ITRPRT = 1.

SEE ALSO:
.MEASURE
.OPTION ITRPRT
.TRAN

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION INTERP

3-90
.OPTION ITL1

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ITL1=x

DESCRIPTION:
Maximum DC iteration limit. Increasing this value rarely
improves convergence in small circuits. Values as high as
400 have resulted in convergence for some large circuits
with feedback (such as operational amplifiers and sense
amplifiers). However, to converge, most models do not
require more than 100 iterations. Set .OPTION ACCT to list
how many iterations an operating point requires. The default
is 200.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ACCT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ITL1

3-91
.OPTION ITL2

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ITL2=x

DESCRIPTION:
Iteration limit for the DC transfer curve. Increasing this limit
improves convergence, only for very large circuits. Default is
50.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ITL2

3-92
.OPTION ITL3

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ITL3=x

DESCRIPTION:
Minimum timestep, in timestep algorithms for transient
analysis. ITL3 is the minimum number of iterations required,
to obtain convergence. If the number of iterations is less
than ITL3, the internal timestep (Delta) doubles.
Use this option to decrease simulation times, in circuits
where the nodes are stable most of the time (such as digital
circuits). If the number of iterations is greater than IMIN, the
timestep stays the same, unless the timestep exceeds the
IMAX option. ITL3 is the same as IMIN. The default is 3.0.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION IMAX

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ITL3

3-93
.OPTION ITL4

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ITL4=x

DESCRIPTION:
Maximum timestep, in timestep algorithms for transient
analysis. ITL4 sets the maximum iterations, to obtain a
convergent solution at a timepoint. If the number of iterations
needed is greater than ITL4, the internal timestep (Delta)
decreases, by a factor equal to the FT transient control
option. HSPICE uses the new timestep to calculate a new
solution. ITL4 also works with the IMIN transient control
option. ITL4 is the same as IMAX. The default is 8.0.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION IMAX

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ITL4

3-94
.OPTION ITL5

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ITL5=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets an iteration limit for transient analysis. If a circuit uses
more than ITL5 iterations, the program prints all results, up
to that point. The default (0.0) allows an infinite number of
iterations.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ITL5

3-95
.OPTION ITLPTRAN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ITLPTRAN=x

DESCRIPTION:
Controls the iteration limit used in the final try of the pseudo-
transient method, in OP or DC analysis. If simulation fails in
the final try of the pseudo-transient method, enlarge this
option. The default is 30.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ITLPTRAN

3-96
.OPTION ITLPZ

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ITLPZ=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the iteration limit for pole/zero analysis. The default is
100.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ITLPZ

3-97
.OPTION ITRPRT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ITRPRT

DESCRIPTION:
Prints output variables at their internal time points. This
option might generate a long output list.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ITRPRT

3-98
.OPTION KCLTEST

SYNTAX:
.OPTION KCLTEST=x

DESCRIPTION:
Activates KCL (Kirchhoff’s Current Law) test. increases
simulation time, especially for large circuits, but very
accurately checks the solution. Default=0.
If you set this value to 1, HSPICE sets these options:
• Sets RELMOS and ABSMOS options to 0 (off).
• Sets ABSI to 1e-6 A.
• Sets RELI to 1e-6.

To satisfy the KCL test, each node must satisfy this

condition:
Σi b < RELI ⋅ Σ i b + ABSI

In this equation, the ibs are the node currents.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ABSI
.OPTION RELI
.OPTION RELMOS

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION KCLTEST

3-99
.OPTION KLIM

SYNTAX:
.OPTION KLIM=x

DESCRIPTION:
This option sets the minimum mutual inductance, below
which automatic second-order mutual inductance
calculation no longer proceeds. KLIM is unitless (analogous
to coupling strength, specified in the K Element). Typical
KLIM values are between .5 and 0.0. The default is 0.01.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION KLIM

3-100
.OPTION LENNAM

SYNTAX:
.OPTION LENNAM=x

DESCRIPTION:
Maximum length of names, in the printout of operating point
analysis results. Default is 8, and the maximum x
value=1024.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION LENNAM

3-101
.OPTION LIMPTS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION LIMPTS=x

DESCRIPTION:
Number of points to print or plot in AC analysis. You do not
need to set LIMPTS for DC or transient analysis. HSPICE
spools the output file to disk. Default=2001.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION LIMPTS

3-102
.OPTION LIMTIM

SYNTAX:
.OPTION LIMTIM=x

DESCRIPTION:
Amount of CPU time reserved to generate prints and plots, if
a CPU time limit (CPTIME = x) terminates simulation.
Default=2 (seconds), normally sufficient for short printouts
and plots.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION CPTIME

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION LIMTIM

3-103
.OPTION LIST

SYNTAX:
.OPTION LIST

DESCRIPTION:
This option produces an element summary of the input data
to print, and calculates effective sizes of elements and the
key values.

• BRIEF suppresses the LIST option.

• VERIFY is an alias for LIST

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION BRIEF
.OPTION UNWRAP
.OPTION VERIFY

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION LIST

3-104
.OPTION LVLTIM

SYNTAX:
.OPTION LVLTIM=x

DESCRIPTION:
Selects the timestep algorithm, for transient analysis.
• LVLTIM = 1 (default) uses the DVDT timestep algorithm.

• LVLTIM = 2 uses the timestep algorithm for local

truncation error.

• LVLTIM = 3 uses the DVDT timestep algorithm with

timestep reversal.
• To use the GEAR method of numerical integration and
linearization, select LVLTIM = 2.

• To use the TRAP linearization algorithm, select

LVLTIM = 1 or 3. Using LVLTIM = 1 (DVDT option) is the
default, and helps avoid internal timestep too small non-
convergence.

The local truncation algorithm (LVLTIM = 2) provides a

higher degree of accuracy than the TRAP method. If you use
this option, errors do not propagate from time point to time
point, which can result in an unstable solution.
SEE ALSO:
.OPTION DVDT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION LVLTIM

3-105
.OPTION MAXAMP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MAXAMP=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the maximum current, through voltage-defined
branches (voltage sources and inductors). If the current
exceeds the MAXAMP value, HSPICE reports an error. The
default is 0.0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MAXAMP

3-106
.OPTION MAXORD

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MAXORD=x

DESCRIPTION:
Maximum order of integration, for the GEAR method in
HSPICE. The x value can be either 1 or 2.

• MAXORD = 1 uses the backward Euler integration

method.

• MAXORD = 2 (default) is more stable, accurate, and

practical.
SEE ALSO:
.OPTION METHOD

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MAXORD

3-107
.OPTION MBYPASS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MBYPASS=x

DESCRIPTION:
Computes the default value of the BYTOL control option:
BYTOL = MBYPASSxVNTOL
Also multiplies the RELV voltage tolerance. Set MBYPASS
to about 0.1, for precision analog circuits.
• Default is 1, for DVDT = 0, 1, 2, or 3.
• Default is 2, for DVDT = 4.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION DVDT
.OPTION RELV

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MBYPASS

3-108
.OPTION MEASDGT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MEASDGT=x

DESCRIPTION:
Formats the .MEASURE statement output, in both the listing
file and the .MEASURE output files (.ma0, .mt0, .ms0, and
so on).
The value of x is typically between 1 and 7, although you can
set it as high as 10. The default is 4.0.
For example, if MEASDGT = 5, then .MEASURE displays
numbers as:
• Five decimal digits, for numbers in scientific notation.

• Five digits to the right of the decimal, for numbers

between 0.1 and 999.
In the listing (.lis), file, all .MEASURE output values are in
scientific notation, so .OPTION MEASDGT = 5 results in five
decimal digits.
Use MEASDGT with .OPTION INGOLD = x to control the
output data format.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION INGOLD
.MEASURE

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MEASDGT

3-109
.OPTION MEASFAIL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MEASFAIL=0|1

DESCRIPTION:
You can assign the .OPTION MEASFAIL option the following
values:

• If MEASFAIL=0, outputs 0 into the .mt#, .ms#, or .ma#

file, and prints failed to the listing file.

• If MEASFAIL=1 (default), prints failed into

the .mt#, .ms#, or .ma# file, and into the listing
file: .OPTION MEASFAIL=1 | 0

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MEASFAIL

3-110
.OPTION MEASSORT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MEASSORT=x

DESCRIPTION:
In versions of HSPICE before 2003.09, to automatically sort
large numbers of .MEASURE statements, you could use
the .OPTION MEASSORT statement.

• .OPTION MEASSORT=0 (default; did not

sort .MEASURE statements).
• .OPTION MEASSORT=1 (internally sorted .MEASURE
statements).
You needed to set this option to 1 only if you used a large
number of .MEASURE statements, where you needed to list
similar variables together (to reduce simulation time). For a
small number of .MEASURE statements, turning on internal
sorting sometimes slowed-down simulation while sorting,
compared to not sorting first.
Starting in version 2003.09, this option is obsolete. Now the
measure performance is order independent, and HSPICE
ignores this option.

SEE ALSO:
.MEASURE

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MEASSORT

3-111
.OPTION MEASOUT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MEASOUT=x

DESCRIPTION:
This option outputs .MEASURE statement values and
sweep parameters into an ASCII file. Post-analysis
processing (AvanWaves or other analysis tools) uses this
<design>.mt# file, where # increments for each .TEMP
or .ALTER block.
For example, for a parameter sweep of an output load,
which measures the delay, the .mt# file contains data for a
delay-versus-fanout plot. The default is 1. You can set this
option to 0 (off) in the hspice.ini file.

SEE ALSO:
.ALTER
.TEMP

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MEASOUT

3-112
.OPTION MENTOR

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MENTOR=x

DESCRIPTION:
MENTOR = 2 enables the Mentor MSPICE-compatible
(ASCII) interface. This option requires a specific license.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MENTOR

3-113
.OPTION METHOD

SYNTAX:
.OPTION METHOD=GEAR|TRAP

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the numerical integration method, for a transient
analysis, to either GEAR or TRAP.

• To use GEAR, set METHOD = GEAR, which sets

LVLTIM = 2.

• To change LVLTIM from 2 to 1 or 3, set LVLTIM = 1 or 3,

after the METHOD = GEAR option. This overrides
METHOD=GEAR, which sets LVLTIM = 2.
TRAP (trapezoidal) integration usually reduces program
execution time, with more accurate results. However, this
method can introduce an apparent oscillation on printed or
plotted nodes, which might not result from circuit behavior.
To test this, run a transient analysis, using a small timestep.
If oscillation disappears, the cause was the trapezoidal
method.
The GEAR method is a filter, removing oscillations that
occur in the trapezoidal method. Highly non-linear circuits
(such as operational amplifiers) can require very long
execution times, when you use the GEAR method.
Circuits that do not converge in trapezoidal integration, often
converge if you use GEAR. Default is TRAP (trapezoidal).
Gear algorithm:
OPTION METHOD = GEAR
Backward-Euler:
OPTION METHOD = GEAR MU = 0

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION METHOD

3-114
Trapezoidal algorithm (default):
OPTION METHOD = TRAP

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION LVLTIM
.OPTION MU

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION METHOD

3-115
.OPTION MODMONTE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MODMONTE=x

DESCRIPTION:
If MODMONTE=1, then within a single simulation run, each
device that shares the same model card and is in the same
Monte Carlo index receives a different random value for
parameters that have a Monte Carlo definition.
If MODMONTE=0 (default), then within a single simulation
run, each device that shares the same model card and is in
the same Monte Carlo index, receives the same random
value for its parameters that have a Monte Carlo definition.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MODMONTE

3-116
.OPTION MODSRH

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MODSRH=x

EXAMPLE:
example.sp:
* modsrh used incorrectly
.option post modsrh=1
xi1 net8 b c t6
xi0 a b net8 t6
v1 a 0 pulse 3.3 0.0 10E-6 1E-9 1E-9
+ 25E-6 50E-6
v2 b 0 2
v3 c 0 3
.model nch nmos level=49 version=3.2
.end
This input file automatically searches for t6.inc. If t6.inc
includes the nch model, and you set MODSRH to 1, HSPICE
does not load nch. Do not set MODSRH=1 in this type of file
call. Use this option in front of the .MODEL card definition.
DESCRIPTION:
If MODSRH=1, HSPICE does not load or reference a model
described in a .MODEL statement, if the netlist does not use
that model. This option shortens simulation run time, when
the netlist references many models, but no element in the
netlist calls those models. The default is MODSRH=0. If
MODSRH=1, then the read-in time increases slightly.

SEE ALSO:
.MODEL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MODSRH

3-117
.OPTION MONTECON

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MONTECON=x

DESCRIPTION:
Continues a Monte Carlo analysis in HSPICE. Retrieves the
next random value, even if non-convergence occurs. A
random value can be too large, or too small, to cause
convergence to fail. Other types of analysis can use this
Monte Carlo random value.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MONTECON

3-118
.OPTION MU

SYNTAX:
.OPTION MU=x

DESCRIPTION:
This option defines the coefficient for trapezoidal integration.
The value range is 0.0 to 0.5, and the default is 0.5.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION MU

3-119
.OPTION NEWTOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NEWTOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Calculates one or more iterations past convergence, for
every calculated DC solution and timepoint circuit solution. If
you do not set NEWTOL, after HSPICE determines
convergence, the convergence routine ends, and the next
program step begins. The default is 0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NEWTOL

3-120
.OPTION NODE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NODE=x

EXAMPLE:
1 M1:B D2:+ Q4:B
This sample part of a cross reference line indicates that the
bulk of M1, the anode of D2, and the base of Q4, all connect
to node 1.
DESCRIPTION:
Prints a node cross reference table. The BRIEF option
suppresses NODE. The table lists each node and all
elements connected to it. A code indicates the terminal of
each element. A colon (:) separates the code from the
element name.
The codes are:
+ Diode anode
- Diode cathode
B BJT base
B MOSFET or JFET bulk
C BJT collector
D MOSFET or JFET drain
E BJT emitter
G MOSFET or JFET gate
S BJT substrate
S MOSFET or JFET source

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION BRIEF

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NODE

3-121
.OPTION NOELCK

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NOELCK

DESCRIPTION:
No element check; bypasses element checking, to reduce
pre-processing time for very large files.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NOELCK

3-122
.OPTION NOMOD

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NOMOD

DESCRIPTION:
Suppresses the printout of model parameters.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NOMOD

3-123
.OPTION NOPAGE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NOPAGE

DESCRIPTION:
Suppresses page ejects for title headings.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NOPAGE

3-124
.OPTION NOPIV

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NOPIV=x

DESCRIPTION:
Prevents HSPICE from automatically switching to pivoting
matrix factors, if a nodal conductance is less than PIVTOL.
NOPIV inhibits pivoting.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION PIVTOL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NOPIV

3-125
.OPTION NOTOP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NOTOP

DESCRIPTION:
Suppresses topology checks to increase the speed for pre-
processing very large files.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NOTOP

3-126
.OPTION NOWARN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NOWARN

DESCRIPTION:
Suppresses all warning messages, except those generated
from statements in .ALTER blocks.

SEE ALSO:
.ALTER

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NOWARN

3-127
.OPTION NUMDGT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NUMDGT=x

DESCRIPTION:
Number of significant digits to print, for output variable
values. The value of x is typically between 1 and 7, although
you can set it as high as 10. Default is 4.0. This option does
not affect the accuracy of the simulation.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NUMDGT

3-128
.OPTION NXX

SYNTAX:
.OPTION NXX

DESCRIPTION:
Stops printback of the data file, until HSPICE finds
an .OPTION BRIEF = 0, or the .END statement. It also
resets the LIST, NODE, and OPTS options, and sets
NOMOD. BRIEF = 0 enables printback. NXX is the same as
BRIEF.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION BRIEF

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION NXX

3-129
.OPTION OFF

SYNTAX:
.OPTION CSDF=x

DESCRIPTION:
For all active devices, initializes terminal voltages to zero, if
you did not initialize them to other values. For example, if
you did not initialize both drain and source nodes of a
transistor (using .NODESET or .IC statements, or
connecting them to sources), then OFF initializes all nodes
of the transistor to zero.
HSPICE checks the OFF option, before element IC
parameters. If you assigned an element IC parameter to a
node, simulation initializes the node to the element IC
parameter value, even if the OFF option previously set it o
zero.
You can use the OFF element parameter to initialize terminal
voltages to zero, for specific active devices. Use the OFF
option to help find exact DC operating-point solutions, for
large circuits.

SEE ALSO:
.IC
.NODESET

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION OFF

3-130
.OPTION OPTLST

SYNTAX:
.OPTION OPTLIST

DESCRIPTION:
Outputs additional optimization information:
• No information (default).

• Prints parameter, Broyden update, and bisection results

information.

• Prints gradient, error, Hessian, and iteration information.

Prints all of the above, and Jacobian.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION OPTLST

3-131
.OPTION OPTS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION OPTS

DESCRIPTION:
Prints the current settings, for all control options. If you
change any of the default values of the options, the OPTS
option prints the values that the simulation actually uses.
The BRIEF option suppresses OPTS.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION BRIEF

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION OPTS

3-132
.OPTION PARHIER

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PARHIER = < GLOBAL | LOCAL >

EXAMPLE:
.OPTION parhier=<global | local>
.PARAM DefPwid = 1u
.SUBCKT Inv a y DefPwid = 2u DefNwid = 1u
Mp1 <MosPinList> pMosMod L = 1.2u W = DefPwid
Mn1 <MosPinList> nMosMod L = 1.2u W = DefNwid
.ENDS
This example explicitly shows the difference between local
and global scoping, for using parameters in sub-circuits.

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .OPTION PARHIER parameter to specify scoping
rules.
The default setting is GLOBAL.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PARHIER

3-133
.OPTION PATHNUM

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PATHNUM

DESCRIPTION:
Prints subcircuit path numbers, instead of path names.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PATHNUM

3-134
.OPTION PIVOT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PIVOT=x

DESCRIPTION:
Selects a pivot algorithms. Use these algorithms to reduce
simulation time, and to achieve convergence in circuits that
produce hard-to-solve matrix equations. To select the pivot
algorithm, set PIVOT to one of these values:

• 0: Original non-pivoting algorithm.

• 1: Original pivoting algorithm.
• 2: Picks the largest pivot in the row.
• 3: Picks the best pivot in a row.

• 10 (default): Fast, non-pivoting algorithm; requires more

memory.
• 11: Fast, pivoting algorithm; requires more memory than
PIVOT values less than 11.
• 12: Picks the largest pivot in the row; requires more
memory than PIVOT values less than 12.

• 13: Fast, best pivot: faster; requires more memory than

PIVOT values less than 13.
The fastest algorithm is PIVOT = 13, which can improve
simulation time up to ten times, on very large circuits.
However, PIVOT = 13 requires substantially more memory
for simulation.
Some circuits with large conductance ratios, such as
switching regulator circuits, might require pivoting.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PIVOT

3-135
 If PIVTOL = 0, HSPICE automatically changes from non-
pivoting, to a row-pivot strategy, if it detects any diagonal-
matrix entry less than PIVTOL. This strategy provides the
time and memory advantages of non-pivoting inversion, and
avoids unstable simulations and incorrect results.
Use .OPTION NOPIV, to prevent HSPICE from pivoting. For
very large circuits, PIVOT = 10, 11, 12, or 13, can require
excessive memory.
If HSPICE switches to pivoting during a simulation, it
displays the message followed by the node numbers that
cause the problem:
pivot change on the fly
Use .OPTION NODE to cross-reference a node to an
element. The SPARSE option is the same as PIVOT.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PIVOT

3-136
.OPTION PIVREF

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PIVREF=x

DESCRIPTION:
Pivot reference. Use PIVREF in PIVOT = 11, 12, or 13, to
limit the size of the matrix. Default is 1e+8.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION PIVOT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PIVREF

3-137
.OPTION PIVREL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PIVREL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the maximum and minimum ratio of a row or matrix.
Use only if PIVOT = 1. Large values for PIVREL can result in
very long matrix pivot times. If the value is too small,
however, no pivoting occurs. Start with small values of
PIVREL, using an adequate (but not excessive) value, for
convergence and accuracy. The default is 1E-20 (max = 1e-
20, min = 1).
SEE ALSO:
.OPTION PIVOT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PIVREL

3-138
.OPTION PIVTOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PIVTOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Absolute minimum value for which HSPICE accepts a matrix
entry as a pivot. If PIVOT=0, PIVTOL is the minimum
conductance in the matrix. Default=1.0e-15.
PIVTOL must be less than GMIN or GMINDC. Values that
approach 1 increase the pivot.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION GMIN
.OPTION GMINDC
.OPTION PIVOT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PIVTOL

3-139
.OPTION PLIM

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PLIM

DESCRIPTION:
Specifies plot size limits, for current and voltage plots:
• Finds a common plot limit, and plots all variables on one
graph, at the same scale
• Enables SPICE-type plots in HSPICE, which create a
separate scale and axis for each plot variable.
This option does not affect post- processing of graph data.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PLIM

3-140
.OPTION POST

SYNTAX:
.OPTION POST=[0|1|2|3|ASCII|BINARY]

EXAMPLE:
.OPTION POST=2

DESCRIPTION:
Use an .OPTION POST statement to display high-resolution
AvanWaves plots of simulation results, on either a graphics
terminal or a high-resolution laser printer. Use .OPTION
POST to provide output, without specifying other
parameters. POST has defaults, which supply usable data to
most parameters.

Value Description

POST = 0 Does not output simulation results.

POST = 1, BINARY Output format is binary.

POST = 2, ASCII Output format is ASCII.

POST = 3 Output format is New Wave binary.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION POST

3-141
.OPTION POST_VERSION

SYNTAX:
.OPTION POST_VERSION=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the post-processing output version:
• x = 9007 truncates the node name in the post-processor
output file, to a maximum of 16 characters.
• x = 9601 sets the node name length for the output file,
consistent with the input restrictions (1024 characters).
If you set .OPTION POST_VERSION=2001, then the post-
processing output version is switched 2001. This option
shows you the new output file header, which includes the
right number of output variables, rather than **** when the
number exceeds 9999. If you set .OPTION
POST_VERSION=2001 post=2 in the netlist, then HSPICE
returns more-accurate ASCII results.
.option post_version=2001
To use binary values (with double precision) in the output
file, include the following in the input file:
*******************************************
.option post (or post=1) post_version=2001
*******************************************
For more accurate simulation results, comment this format.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION POST_VERSION

3-142
.OPTION PROBE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PROBE=x

DESCRIPTION:
Limits post-analysis output to only variables specified
in .PROBE, .PRINT, .PLOT, and .GRAPH statements. By
default, HSPICE outputs all voltages and power supply
currents, in addition to variables listed in .PROBE/.PRINT/
.PLOT/.GRAPH statements. PROBE significantly
decreases the size of simulation output files.

SEE ALSO:
.GRAPH
.PLOT
.PRINT
.PROBE

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PROBE

3-143
.OPTION PSF

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PSF=x

DESCRIPTION:
Specifies whether HSPICE outputs binary or ASCII data,
when you run an HSPICE simulation from Cadence Analog
Artist. Supported on Sun Solaris 2.5/2.7/2.8, HPUX 10.20
and 11.20, IBM AIX 4.3 platforms only. This option is not
available on the PC RedHat/Linux 7.2 platform.
The value of x can be 1 or 2.
• If x is 2, HSPICE produces ASCII output.

• If .OPTION ARTIST PSF = 1, HSPICE produces binary

output.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ARTIST

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PSF

3-144
.OPTION PURETP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PURETP=x

DESCRIPTION:
Integration method to use, for reversal time point. The
default is 0. If you set puretp=1, then if HSPICE finds non-
convergence, it uses TRAP (instead of B.E) for the reversed
time point. Use this option, with the method=TRAP
statement, to help some oscillating circuits to oscillate, if the
default simulation process cannot satisfy the result.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PURETP

3-145
.OPTION PUTMEAS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION PUTMEAS=0|1

DESCRIPTION:
The .OPTION PUTMEAS option controls the output
variables, listed in the .MEASURE statement.

• 0: Does not save variable values, which are listed in

the .MEASURE statement, into the corresponding output
file (such as .tr#, .ac# or .sw#). This option decreases
the size of the output file.
• 1: Default. Saves variable values, which are listed in
the .MEASURE statement, into the corresponding output
file (such as .tr#, .ac# or .sw#). This option is similar to
the output of HSPICE 2000.4.

SEE ALSO:
.MEASURE

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION PUTMEAS

3-146
.OPTION RELH

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RELH=x

DESCRIPTION:
Relative current tolerance, through voltage-defined
branches (voltage sources and inductors). Use RELH to
check current convergence, but only if the value of the
ABSH control option is greater than zero. Default is 0.05.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ABSH

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RELH

3-147
.OPTION RELI

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RELI=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the relative error/tolerance change, from iteration to
iteration. This parameter determines convergence for all
currents, in diode, BJT, and JFET devices. (RELMOS sets
tolerance for MOSFETs). This is the change in current, from
the value calculated at the previous timepoint.

• Default = 0.01 for KCLTEST = 0.

• Default = 1e-6 for KCLTEST = 1.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION RELMOS
.OPTION KCLTEST

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RELI

3-148
.OPTION RELMOS

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RELMOS=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the relative error tolerance (percent) for drain-to-source
current, from iteration-to-iteration. This parameter
determines convergence for currents in MOSFET devices.
(RELI sets the tolerance for other active devices.) Sets the
change in current, from the value calculated at the previous
timepoint. HSPICE uses the RELMOS value, only if the
current is greater than the ABSMOS floor value. The default
is 0.05.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ABSMOS

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RELMOS

3-149
.OPTION RELQ

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RELQ=x

DESCRIPTION:
Used in the timestep algorithm for local truncation error
(LVLTIM = 2). RELQ changes the timestep size. If the
capacitor charge calculation (in the present iteration)
exceeds that of the past iteration by a percentage greater
than the RELQ value, then HSPICE reduces the internal
timestep (Delta). The default=0.01.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION LVLTIM

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RELQ

3-150
.OPTION RELTOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RELTOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Relative error tolerance for voltages. Use RELTOL, with the
ABSV control option, to determine voltage convergence.
Increasing RELTOL increases the relative error. RELTOL is
the same as RELV. RELI and RELVDC options default to the
RELTOL value. The default is 1e-3.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ABSV
.OPTION RELI
.OPTION RELV
.OPTION RELVDC

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RELTOL

3-151
.OPTION RELV

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RELV=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the relative error tolerance for voltages. If voltage or
current exceeds the absolute tolerances, a RELV test
determines convergence. Increasing RELV increases the
relative error. You should generally maintain RELV at its
default value. RELV conserves simulator charge. For
voltages, RELV is the same as RELTOL. The default is 1e-3.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION RELTOL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RELV

3-152
.OPTION RELVAR

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RELVAR=x

DESCRIPTION:
Use this option with ABSVAR, and the DVDT timestep
algorithm. RELVAR sets the relative voltage change, for
LVLTIM = 1 or 3. If the node voltage at the current time point
exceeds the node voltage at the previous time point by
RELVAR, then HSPICE reduces the timestep, and
calculates a new solution at a new time point. The default is
0.30 (30%).
SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ABSVAR
.OPTION DVDT
.OPTION LVLTIM

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RELVAR

3-153
.OPTION RELVDC

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RELVDC=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the relative error tolerance for voltages. If voltages or
currents exceed their absolute tolerances, the RELVDC test
determines convergence. Increasing RELVDC increases the
relative error. You should generally maintain RELVDC at its
default value. RELVDC conserves simulator charge. Default
is RELTOL (RELTOL default = 1e-3).

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION RELTOL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RELVDC

3-154
.OPTION RESMIN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RESMIN=x

DESCRIPTION:
Minimum resistance for all resistors, including parasitic and
inductive resistances. The default is 1e-5 (ohm), and the
range is 1e-15 to 10 ohm.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RESMIN

3-155
.OPTION RISETIME

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RISETIME=x

DESCRIPTION:
Smallest risetime of a signal. Use this option only in
transmission line models. In the U Element, this equation
determines the number of lumps:
TDeff
MIN 20, 1 + æ ------------------------------ö ⋅ 20
è RISETIMEø

TDeff is the end-to-end delay in a transmission line. The W

Element uses RISETIME, only if Rs or Gd is non-zero. In
such cases, RISETIME determines the maximum signal
frequency.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RISETIME

3-156
.OPTION RMAX

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RMAX=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the TSTEP multiplier, which controls the maximum
value (DELMAX) for the Delta of the internal timestep:
DELMAX = TSTEP x RMAX

• Default = 5, if DVDT = 4 and LVLTIM = 1.

• Otherwise, the default = 2.
The maximum value is 1e+9, the minimum value is 1e-9.
The recommended maximum value is 1e+5.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION DVDT
.OPTION LVLTIM

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RMAX

3-157
.OPTION RMIN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION RMIN=x

DESCRIPTION:
Sets the minimum value of Delta (internal timestep). An
internal timestep smaller than RMINxTSTEP, terminates the
transient analysis, and reports an internal timestep too small
error. If the circuit does not converge in IMAX iterations,
Delta decreases by the amount you set in the FT option. The
default = 1.0e-9.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION FT
.OPTION IMAX

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION RMIN

3-158
.OPTION SCALE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION SCALE=x

DESCRIPTION:
Element scaling factor, in HSPICE. Scales parameters in
element cards, by their value. Default=1.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION SCALE

3-159
.OPTION SCALM

SYNTAX:
.OPTION SCALM=x

DESCRIPTION:
Model scaling factor, in HSPICE. Scales model parameters
by their value. The default is 1. See the HSPICE Elements
and Device Models Manual, for parameters this option
scales.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION SCALM

3-160
.OPTION SDA

SYNTAX:
.OPTION SDA=x

DESCRIPTION:
SDA = 2 produces a Cadence WSF (ASCII format) post-
analysis file, for Opus. This option requires a specific
license. The SDA is the same as the CDS option.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION SDA

3-161
.OPTION SEARCH

SYNTAX:
.OPTION SEARCH = ‘directory_path’

EXAMPLE:
.OPTION SEARCH = ‘$installdir/parts/vendor’

DESCRIPTION:
Use the .OPTION SEARCH statement to automatically
access a library.
This example searches for models in the vendor
subdirectory, under the <$installdir>/parts
installation directory (see Figure 3-1). The parts/ directory
contains the DDL subdirectories.

Figure 3-1 Vendor Library Usage

x1 in out vdd vss buffer_f .OPTION search = ’$installdir/parts/vendor’

$installdir/parts/vendor/buffer_f.inc

$installdir/parts/vendor/skew.dat .macro buffer_f in out vdd vss

.lib ‘$installdir/parts/vendor/skew.dat’ ff
.lib ff $ fast model .inc ‘$installdir/parts/vendor/buffer.inc’
.param vendor_xl = -.1u .eom
.inc ‘$installdir/parts/vendor/model.dat’
.endl ff
$installdir/parts/vendor/buffer.inc
$installdir/parts/vendor/model.dat .macro buffer in out vdd vss
m1 out in vdd vdd nch w = 10 l = 1
.model nch nmos level = 28 ...
+ xl = vendor_xl ...
Note: The ‘/usr’ directory is in the
HSPICE install directory.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION SEARCH

3-162
.OPTION SEED

SYNTAX:
.OPTION SEED=x

DESCRIPTION:
Starting seed for random-number generator in HSPICE
Monte Carlo analysis. The minimum value is 1; the
maximum value is 259200.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION SEED

3-163
.OPTION SLOPETOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION SLOPETOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Minimum value, for breakpoint table entries in a piecewise
linear (PWL) analysis. If the difference in the slopes of two
consecutive PWL segments is less than the SLOPETOL
value, HSPICE ignores the breakpoint, for the point between
the segments. The default is 0.5.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION SLOPETOL

3-164
.OPTION SPARSE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION SPARSE=x

DESCRIPTION:
The SPARSE option is the same as PIVOT.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION PIVOT

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION SPARSE

3-165
.OPTION SPICE

SYNTAX:
.OPTION SPICE=x

EXAMPLE 1:
Example of general parameters, used with .OPTION SPICE:
TNOM = 27 DEFNRD = 1 DEFNRS = 1 INGOLD = 2
ACOUT = 0 DC
PIVOT PIVTOL = IE-13 PIVREL = 1E-3
RELTOL = 1E-3
ITL1 = 100
ABSMOS = 1E-6 RELMOS = 1E-3 ABSTOL = 1E-12
VNTOL = 1E-6
ABSVDC = 1E-6 RELVDC = 1E-3 RELI = 1E-3

EXAMPLE 2:
Example of transient parameters, used with .OPTION
SPICE:
DCAP = 1 RELQ = 1E-3 CHGTOL-1E-14 ITL3 = 4
ITL4 = 10
ITL5 = 5000 FS = 0.125 FT = 0.125

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION SPICE

3-166
EXAMPLE 3:
Example of model parameters, used with .OPTION SPICE:
For BJT: MJS = 0
For MOSFET, CAPOP = 0
LD = 0 if not user-specifiedUTRA = 0 not used by
SPICE for LEVEL = 2NSUB must be specifiedNLEV = 0
for SPICE noise equation

DESCRIPTION:
Makes HSPICE compatible with Berkeley SPICE. If you set
this option, HSPICE uses the options and model parameters
explained in the examples.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION SPICE

3-167
.OPTION STATFL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION STATFL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Controls whether HSPICE creates a .st0 file.
• STATFL=0 (default) outputs a .st0 file.

• STATFL=1 suppresses the .st0 file.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION STATFL

3-168
.OPTION TIMERES

SYNTAX:
.OPTION TIMERES=x

DESCRIPTION:
Minimum separation between breakpoint values, for the
breakpoint table. If two breakpoints are closer together (in
time) than the TIMERES value, HSPICE enters only one of
them in the breakpoint table. The default is 1 ps.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION TIMERES

3-169
.OPTION TNOM

SYNTAX:
.OPTION TNOM=x

DESCRIPTION:
Reference temperature for HSPICE simulation. At this
temperature, component derating is zero. The default is 25
degrees Celsius. If you enable .OPTION SPICE, the default
is 27 degrees Celsius.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION SPICE

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION TNOM

3-170
.OPTION TRCON

SYNTAX:
.OPTION TRCON=x

DESCRIPTION:
Controls the automatic convergence (autoconvergence) and
automatic speedup (autospeedup) processes in HSPICE.
HSPICE also uses autoconvergence in DC analysis, if the
Newton-Raphson (N-R) method fails to converge.
For some large non-linear circuits with large TSTOP/TSTEP
values, analysis might run for an excessively long time. In
this case, HSPICE might automatically set a new and bigger
RMAX value, to speed up the analysis for primary reference.
In most cases, however, HSPICE does not activate this type
of autospeedup process.
For autospeedup to occur, all three of the following
conditions must occur:
• N1 (Number of Nodes) > 1,000

• N2 (TSTOP/TSTEP) >= 10,000

• N3 (Total Number of Diode, BJTs, JFETs and MOSFETs)
> 300

Autospeedup is most likely to occur if the circuit also meets

either of the following conditions:

• N2 >= 1e+8, and N3 > 500, or

• N2 >= 2e+5, and N3 > 1e+4
If HSPICE does activate autospeedup, you might need to
disable it. To do this, set TRCON=-1, and increase TSTEP or
RMAX (or both), to balance accuracy and speed.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION TRCON

3-171
 You can assign the following values to the TRCON option:
• TRCON=1 (the default) enables both autoconvergence
and autospeedup.

• TRCON= 0 enables autospeedup only.

• TRCON =-1 disables both autoconvergence and

autospeedup.
If the circuit fails to converge using the trapezoidal (TRAP)
numerical integration method (for example, because of
trapezoidal oscillation), HSPICE uses the GEAR method
and LTE timestep algorithm, to run the transient analysis
again from time=0. This process is called autoconvergence.
Autoconvergence sets options to their default values before
the second try:
METHOD=GEAR, LVLTIM=2, MBYPASS=1.0,
BYPASS=0.0, SLOPETOL=0.5, BYTOL=
min{mbypas*vntol and reltol}
RMAX=2.0 if it was 5.0 in the first run; otherwise RMAX does
not change.
SEE ALSO:
.OPTION BYPASS
.OPTION BYTOL
.OPTION MBYPASS
.OPTION RMAX
.OPTION SLOPETOL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION TRCON

3-172
.OPTION TRTOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION TRTOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Used in the timestep algorithm for local truncation error
(LVLTIM = 2). HSPICE multiplies TRTOL by the internal
timestep, which the timestep algorithm for the local
truncation error generates. TRTOL reduces simulation time,
and maintains accuracy. It estimates the amount of error
introduced, when the algorithm truncates the Taylor series
expansion. This error reflects the minimum time-step, to
reduce simulation time and maintain accuracy. The range of
TRTOL is 0.01 to 100; typical values are 1 to 10. If you set
TRTOL to 1 (the minimum value), HSPICE uses a very small
timestep. As you increase the TRTOL setting, the timestep
size increases. The default is 7.0.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION LVLTIM

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION TRTOL

3-173
.OPTION UNWRAP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION UNWRAP

DESCRIPTION:
Displays phase results for AC analysis, in unwrapped form
(with a continuous phase plot).HSPICE uses these results to
accurately calculate group delay. It also uses unwrapped
phase results to compute group delay, even if you do not set
UNWRAP.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION UNWRAP

3-174
.OPTION VERIFY

SYNTAX:
.OPTION VERIFY

DESCRIPTION:
The VERIFY option is an alias for the LIST option.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION LIST

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION VERIFY

3-175
.OPTION VFLOOR

SYNTAX:
.OPTION VFLOOR=x

DESCRIPTION:
Minimum voltage to print in output listing. All voltages lower
than VFLOOR, print as 0. Affects only the output listing:
VNTOL (ABSV) sets minimum voltage to use in a simulation.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION VNTOL

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION VFLOOR

3-176
.OPTION VNTOL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION VNTOL=x

DESCRIPTION:
The VNTOL option is the same as the ABSV option.

SEE ALSO:
.OPTION ABSV

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION VNTOL

3-177
.OPTION WARNLIMIT

SYNTAX:
.OPTION WARNLIMIT=x

DESCRIPTION:
Limits how many times certain warnings appear in the output
listing. This reduces the output listing file size. x is the
maximum number of warnings for each warning type. This
limit applies to the following warning messages:

• MOSFET has negative conductance.

• Node conductance is zero.
• Saturation current is too small.
• Inductance or capacitance is too large.

The default is 1.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION WARNLIMIT

3-178
.OPTION WL

SYNTAX:
.OPTION WL=x

DESCRIPTION:
Reverses the specified order, in the VSIZE MOS element.
Default order is length-width; changes the order to width-
length. The default is 0.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION WL

3-179
.OPTION XDTEMP

SYNTAX:
.OPTION XDTEMP=value

EXAMPLE:
.OPTION XDTEMP
X1 2 0 SUB1 DTEMP=2
.SUBCKT SUB1 A B
R1 A B 1K DTEMP=3
C1 A B 1P
X2 A B sub2 DTEMP=4
.ENDS
.SUBCKT SUB2 A B
R2 A B 1K
.ENDS
In this example:
1. X1 sets a temperature difference (2 degrees Celsius)
between the elements within the subcircuit SUB1.
2. X2 (a subcircuit instance of X1) sets a temperature
difference by the DTEMP value of both X1 and X2 (2+4=6
degrees Celsius) between the elements within the SUB2
subcircuit. Finally, the DTEMP value of each element in
this example is:
Elements DTEMP Value (Celsius)
X1 2
X1.R1 2+3 =5
X1.C1 2
X2 2+4=6
X2.R2 6

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION XDTEMP

3-180
DESCRIPTION:
The .OPTION XDTEMP statement defines how HSPICE
interprets the DTEMP parameter, where value is either:
• 0 (the default), indicating a user-defined parameter, or

• 1 indicates a temperature difference parameter.

If you set .OPTION XDTEMP to 1, HSPICE adds the
DTEMP value in the subcircuit call statement to all elements
within the subcircuit, that use the DTEMP keyword syntax.
The DTEMP parameter is cumulative throughout the design
hierarchy.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION XDTEMP

3-181
.OPTION ZUKEN

SYNTAX:
.OPTION ZUKEN=x

DESCRIPTION:
This option enables or disables the Zuken interface.
• If x is 2, enables the Zuken interactive interface.

• If x is 1 (default), disables this interface.

Options in HSPICE Netlists: .OPTION ZUKEN

3-182
Index

A ALTCHK option 3-25

alter block commands 1-1
ABSH option 3-14
.ALTER command 2-12, 2-39
ABSI option 3-15, 3-99
Analog Artist interface 3-27, 3-144
ABSMOS option 3-16, 3-99
See also Artist
ABSTOL option 3-17
Analysis commands 1-2
ABSV option 3-18
analysis, network 2-121
ABSVAR option 3-19
arithmetic expression 2-103
ABSVDC option 3-20
ARTIST option 3-27, 3-144
AC analysis
ASCII output data 3-39, 3-112, 3-161
magnitude 3-23
optimization 2-5 ASPEC option 3-26
output 3-23 AT keyword 2-101
phase 3-23 autoconvergence 3-53
.AC command 2-5 AUTOSTOP option 3-28
external data 2-25 average measurements, with .MEASURE 2-96
ACCURATE option 3-22 average nodal voltage, with .MEASURE 2-105
ACOUT option 3-23 average value, measuring 2-105
algorithms AVG keyword 2-107
DVDT 3-19, 3-105
GEAR 3-105
local truncation error 3-105, 3-150, 3-173 B
pivoting 3-135 BADCHR option 3-29, 3-30
timestep control 3-69 BETA keyword 2-145
transient analysis timestep 3-105 .BIASCHK command 2-14
TRAP 3-105
BIASFILE option 3-31
trapezoidal integration 3-114
BIAWARN option 3-32
.ALIAS command 2-9
BINPRINT option 3-33
ALL keyword 2-125, 2-147
bisection data, printing 3-131
ALT9999 option 3-24

IN-1
BKPSIZ option 3-34 .DEL LIB 2-36
branch current error 3-15 .DISTO 2-40
breakpoint table, size 3-34 .DOUT 2-43
BRIEF option 2-125, 3-2, 3-35, 3-104, 3-121, .EBD 2-45
3-129, 3-132 .ELSE 2-47
Broyden update data, printing 3-131 .ELSEIF 2-48
.END 2-50
BSIM model, LEVEL 13 2-116
.ENDDATA 2-52
BSIM2 model, LEVEL 39 2-116
.ENDIF 2-53
BYPASS option 3-36 .ENDL 2-54
BYTOL option 3-37 .ENDS 2-55
.EOM 2-56
.FFT 2-57
C .FOUR 2-60
Cadence .FSOPTIONS 2-62
Opus 3-39, 3-161 .GLOBAL 2-64
WSF format 3-39, 3-161 .GRAPH 2-65
capacitance .IBIS 2-67
charge tolerance, setting 3-40 .IC 2-68
CSHUNT node-to-ground 3-46 .IF 2-70
table of values 3-38 .INCLUDE 2-72
capacitor, models 2-115 .LAYERSTACK 2-73
CAPTAB option 3-38 .LIB 2-75
CDS option 3-39 .LOAD 2-81
CENDIF optimization parameter 2-117 .MACRO 2-84
characterization of models 2-31 .MALIAS 2-87
.MATERIAL 2-89
charge tolerance, setting 3-40
.MEASURE 2-91
CHGTOL option 3-40
.MODEL 2-114
CLOSE optimization parameter 2-117 .NET 2-120
CO option 2-172, 2-177, 3-41 .NODESET 2-122
column laminated data 2-23 .NOISE 2-123
commands .OP 2-124
.AC 2-5 .PARAM 2-127
.ALIAS 2-9 .PKG 2-132
.ALTER 2-12, 2-39 .PLOT 2-134
alter block 1-1 .PRINT 2-136
analysis 1-2 .PROBE 2-141
.BIASCHK 2-14 .PROTECT 2-142
.CONNECT 2-17 .PZ 2-143
.DATA 2-19 .SAVE 2-146
.DC 2-28 .SENS 2-148
.DCVOLT 2-34 .SHAPE 2-150

IN-2
 .STIM 2-156 setting DCON 3-53
subcircuit 1-5 steady state 3-82
.SUBCKT 2-162 CPTIME option 3-43
.TEMP 2-165 CPU time, reducing 3-122
.TF 2-167 CROSS keyword 2-100
.TITLE 2-169
CSDF option 3-44
.TRAN 2-170
CSHDC option 3-45
.UNPROTECT 2-175
.VEC 2-176 CSHUNT option 3-46
.WIDTH 2-177 current
ABSMOS floor value for convergence 3-149
Common Simulation Data Format 3-67
branch 3-15
concatenated data files 2-22
operating point table 2-125
Conditional Block 1-2
CURRENT keyword 2-125
conductance
CUT optimization parameter 2-118
current source, initialization 3-79
minimum, setting 3-80 CVTOL option 3-47
models 3-54
MOSFETs 3-81
negative, logging 3-66
D
node-to-ground 3-83 D_IBIS option 3-48
sweeping 3-82 .DATA command 2-19, 2-21
.CONNECT command 2-17 datanames 2-25
control options external file 2-19
defaults 3-3 for sweep data 2-24
printing 3-132 inline data 2-25
setting 3-2 data files, disabling printout 3-35, 3-129
transient analysis DATA keyword 2-7, 2-24, 2-31, 2-172
limit 3-176 datanames 2-25, 2-159
CONVERGE option 3-42, 3-55 DC
convergence analysis
for optimization 2-119 decade variation 2-32
problems initialization 3-52
causes 3-36 iteration limit 3-91
changing integration algorithm 3-114 linear variation 2-32
CONVERGE option 3-42, 3-55 list of points 2-32
DCON setting 3-53 octave variation 2-32
decreasing the timestep 3-76 optimization 2-28
internal timestep too small 3-105 .DC command 2-28, 2-31
.NODESET statement 2-122 external data with .DATA 2-25
nonconvergent node listing 3-53 DCAP option 3-49
operating point Debug mode 2-125 DCCAP option 3-50

IN-3
DCFOR option 3-51 DVDT
DCHOLD option 3-52 algorithm 3-19, 3-153
DCON option 3-53 option 3-69, 3-105
DCSTEP option 3-54 DVDT option 3-69
DCTRAN option 3-55 DVTR option 3-70
.DCVOLT command 2-34, 2-68
DEBUG keyword 2-125 E
DEC keyword 2-8, 2-32, 2-173
.EBD command 2-45
DEFAD option 3-56
element
DEFAS option 3-57 checking, suppression of 3-122
DEFL option 3-58 OFF parameter 3-130
DEFNRD option 3-59 .ELSE command 2-47
DEFNRS option 3-60 .ELSEIF command 2-48
DEFPD option 3-61 Encryption 1-2
DEFPS option 3-62 .END command 2-50
DEFW option 3-63 for multiple HSPICE runs 2-51
.DEL LIB command 2-36 location 2-50
with .ALTER 2-39 .ENDDATA command 2-52
with .LIB 2-39 ENDDATA keyword 2-19, 2-22, 2-26
DELMAX option 3-64, 3-157 .ENDIF command 2-53
DELTA internal timestep 3-64 .ENDL command 2-54, 2-77, 2-78
See also timestep .ENDS command 2-55
derivative function 2-109
.EOM command 2-56
DERIVATIVE keyword 2-110 EPSMIN option 3-71
derivatives, measuring 2-99 equation 2-103
DI option 3-65 ERR function 2-112
DIAGNOSTIC option 3-66 ERR1 function 2-112
DIFSIZ optimization parameters 2-118 ERR2 function 2-112
DIM2 distortion measure 2-42 ERR3 function 2-112
DIM3 distortion measure 2-42 error function 2-112
diode models 2-115 errors
.DISTO command 2-40 branch current 3-15
distortion function 2-112
HD2 2-42 internal timestep too small 3-46, 3-105,
HD3 2-42 3-158
distortion measures optimization goal 2-94
DIM2 2-42 tolerances
DIM3 2-42 ABSMOS 3-16
DLENCSDF option 3-67 branch current 3-15
.DOUT command 2-43 RELMOS 3-16
DV option 3-53, 3-68 voltage 3-151, 3-152, 3-154
example, subcircuit test 2-84, 2-162

IN-4
EXPLI option 3-72 G
EXPMAX option 3-73
GEAR algorithm 3-105
expression, arithmetic 2-103
GENK option 3-78
external data files 2-26
.GLOBAL command 2-64
global node names 2-64
F GMAX option 3-79
FALL keyword 2-100 GMIN option 3-80, 3-81
FAST option 3-74 GMINDC option 3-81
.FFT command 2-57 GOAL keyword 2-106
FFTOUT option 3-75 GRAD optimization parameter 2-118
FIL keyword 2-26 gradient data, printing 3-131
files GRAMP
column lamination 2-23 calculation 3-53
concatenated data files 2-22 option 3-82
filenames 2-26 .GRAPH command 2-65
hspice.ini 3-112 graph data file (Viewlogic format) 3-67
include files 2-72, 2-77 GSHUNT option 3-83
multiple simulation runs 2-51
FIND keyword 2-99
FIND, using with .MEASURE 2-98
H
floating point overflow H9007 option 3-84
CONVERGE setting 3-42 harmonic distortion 2-42
setting GMINDC 3-81 HD2 distortion 2-42
.FOUR command 2-60 HD3 distortion 2-42
frequency HIER_SCALE option 3-85
ratio 2-41 HSPICE
sweep 2-6 job statistics report 3-21
FROM parameter 2-113 version
FS option 2-145, 3-76 H9007 compatibility 3-84
.FSOPTIONS command 2-62 parameter 2-116
FT option 3-77 hspice.ini file 3-112
functions
ERR 2-112
ERR1 2-112
I
ERR2 2-112 .IBIS command 2-67
ERR3 2-112 IBIS commands 1-3
error 2-112 .IC command 2-34, 2-68
from .SAVE 2-146
IC parameter 2-34, 2-68, 2-147
ICSWEEP option 3-86

IN-5
.IF command 2-70 intermodulation distortion 2-42
IGNOR keyword 2-113 INTERP option 3-90
IMAX option 3-87, 3-94 iterations
IMIN option 3-88, 3-93 limit 3-91
inactive devices maximum number of 3-95
See latent devices ITL1 option 3-91
.INCLUDE command 2-72 ITL2 option 3-92
include files 2-72, 2-77 ITL3 option 3-93
indepout 2-159 ITL4 option 3-94
indepvar 2-158, 2-159, 2-160 ITL5 option 3-95
inductors, mutual model 2-115 ITLPTRAN option 3-96
INGOLD option 3-89, 3-109 ITLPZ option 3-97
initial conditions ITROPT optimization parameter 2-118
saving and reusing 3-86 ITRPRT option 3-98
transient 2-173
initialization 3-130
inline data 2-25 J
inner sweep 2-21 Jacobian data, printing 3-131
input
data
adding library data 2-39 K
column laminated 2-23 KCLTEST option 3-99
concatenated data files 2-22 keywords
deleting library data 2-39 .AC statement parameter 2-7
external, with .DATA statement 2-24 ALL 2-125, 2-147
filenames on networks 2-24 AT 2-101
formats 2-23, 2-25 AVG 2-107
include files 2-72 BETA 2-145
printing 3-104 CROSS 2-100
suppressing printout 3-104 CURRENT 2-125
netlist file 2-50 DATA 2-7, 2-24, 2-31, 2-172
INTEG keyword 2-107, 2-108 .DATA command parameter 2-24
used with .MEASURE 2-105 .DC command parameter 2-31
integral function 2-108 DEBUG 2-125
integration DEC 2-8, 2-32, 2-173
backward Euler method 3-107 DERIVATIVE 2-110
order of 3-107 ENDDATA 2-19, 2-22, 2-26
interfaces FALL 2-100
Analog Artist 3-27, 3-144 FIL 2-26
Mentor 3-113 FIND 2-99
MSPICE 3-113 FS 2-145
ZUKEN 3-182 IGNOR 2-113

IN-6
 INTEG 2-105, 2-107, 2-108 BYTOL option 3-37
LAM 2-23, 2-26 excluding 3-74
LAST 2-100, 2-101 MBYPASS option 3-37
LIN 2-8, 2-32, 2-173 removing from simulation 3-37
MAXFLD 2-145 VNTOL option 3-37
.MEASUREMENT command .LAYERSTACK command 2-73
parameter 2-107 LENNAM option 3-101
MER 2-22, 2-23, 2-26
LEVEL 13 BSIM model 2-116
MINVAL 2-113
LEVEL parameter 2-118
MODEL 2-31
.MODEL statement parameters 2-114 .LIB command 2-75
MONTE 2-7, 2-172 call statement 2-77
NONE 2-125, 2-147 in .ALTER blocks 2-77
NUMF 2-145 nesting 2-78
OCT 2-8, 2-32, 2-173 with .DEL LIB 2-39
OPTIMIZE 2-32 libraries
PLOT 2-114 adding with .LIB 2-39
POI 2-8, 2-32, 2-173 building 2-77
PP 2-106, 2-107 DDL 3-162
RESULTS 2-32 defining macros 2-78
RIN 2-121 deleting 2-36
RISE 2-100 private 2-142
START 2-173 protecting 2-142
SWEEP 2-8, 2-32, 2-173 Library Management 1-3
target syntax 2-101 LIMPTS option 3-102
TO 2-106, 2-113 LIMTIM option 3-103
TOL 2-145 LIN keyword 2-8, 2-32, 2-173
TOP 2-147 LIST option 3-104
.TRAN command parameter 2-172 listing, suppressing 2-142
TRIG 2-93
.LOAD command 2-81
VOLTAGE 2-125
local truncation error algorithm 3-105,
WEIGHT 2-107, 2-113
3-150, 3-173
weight 2-107
LVLTIM option 3-105, 3-114, 3-153, 3-173
WHEN 2-99
Kirchhoff’s Current Law (KCL) test 3-99
KLIM option 3-100 M
.MACRO command 2-84
L macros 2-39, 2-78
magnetic core models 2-115
LAM keyword 2-23, 2-26
.MALIAS command 2-87
laminated data 2-23
.MATERIAL command 2-89
LAST keyword 2-100, 2-101
latent devices Material Properties 1-3
BYPASS option 3-36, 3-37

IN-7
matrix suppressing printout of 3-123
minimum pivot values 3-139 TEMP 2-166
parameters 2-120 models
row/matrix ratio 3-138 BJTs 2-115
size limitation 3-137 BSIM LEVEL 13 2-116
MAX 2-105 BSIM2 LEVEL 39 2-116
MAX parameter 2-107, 2-118 capacitors 2-115
MAXAMP option 3-106 characterization 2-31
MAXFLD keyword 2-145 diode 2-115
JFETs 2-115
maximum value, measuring 2-105
magnetic core 2-115
MAXORD option 3-107
MOSFETs 2-115
MBYPASS option 3-37, 3-108 mutual inductors 2-115
MEASDGT option 3-109 names 2-115
MEASFAIL option 3-110 npn BJT 2-115
MEASOUT option 3-112 op-amps 2-115
MEASSORT option 3-111 optimization 2-115
.MEASURE command 2-91, 3-109, 3-112 plot 2-115
average measurements 2-96 private 2-142
average nodal voltage 2-105 protecting 2-142
expression 2-103 simulator access 2-78
propogation delay 2-92 types 2-115
measuring average values 2-105 models, diode 2-115
measuring derivatives 2-99 MODMONTE option 3-116
Mentor interface 3-113 MODSRH option 3-117
MENTOR option 3-113 Monte Carlo
MER keyword 2-22, 2-23, 2-26 AC analysis 2-6
messages DC analysis 2-28
See also errors, warnings time analysis 2-171
messages, pivot change 3-136 MONTE keyword 2-7, 2-172
METHOD option 3-114 MONTECON option 3-118
MIN 2-105 MSPICE simulator interface 3-113
MIN parameter 2-107 MU option 3-119
minimum value, measuring 2-105
MINVAL keyword 2-113 N
.MODEL command 2-114
namei 2-158, 2-159, 2-160
HSPICE version parameter 2-116
n-channel, MOSFET’s models 2-115
model name 2-115
negative conductance, logging 3-66
MODEL keyword 2-31
model parameters nested library calls 2-78
LEVEL 2-118 .NET comamnd 2-120

IN-8
network operating point
analysis 2-121 capacitance 3-38
filenames 2-24 .IC statement initialization 2-34, 2-68
network analysis 2-121 .NODESET statement initialization 2-122
NEWTOL option 3-120 restoring 2-82
Node Naming 1-4 solution 3-130
voltage table 2-125
NODE option 3-121
optimization
nodes
AC analysis 2-5
cross-reference table 3-121
algorithm 2-118
global versus local 2-64
DC analysis 2-28
printing 3-121
error function 2-94
.NODESET command 2-122, 3-51
iterations 2-118
DC operating point initialization 2-122
models 2-115
from .SAVE 2-146
time
NODESET keyword 2-147 analysis 2-171
node-to-element list 3-136 required 2-117
NOELCK option 3-122 optimization parameter, DIFSIZ 2-118
noise OPTIMIZE keyword 2-32
folding 2-145 .OPTION 2-126, 3-2
numerical 3-46 SEARCH 3-162
sampling 2-145
.OPTION ABSH 3-14
.NOISE command 2-123
.OPTION ABSI 3-15
NOMOD option 3-123
.OPTION ABSMOS 3-16
NONE keyword 2-125, 2-147
.OPTION ABSTOL 3-17
NOPAGE option 3-124
.OPTION ABSV 3-18
NOPIV option 3-125
.OPTION ABSVAR 3-19
NOTOP option 3-126
.OPTION ABSVDC 3-20
NOWARN option 3-127
.OPTION ACCT 3-20
npn BJT models 2-115
.OPTION ACCURATE 3-22
npoints 2-158, 2-159, 2-160
.OPTION ACOUT 3-23
NUMDGT option 3-128
.OPTION ALT999 3-22
numerical integration algorithms 3-114
.OPTION ALT9999 3-24
numerical noise 3-46, 3-83
.OPTION ALTCHK 3-25
NUMF keyword 2-145
.OPTION ARTIST 3-27, 3-144
NXX option 3-129
.OPTION ASPEC 3-26
.OPTION AUTOSTOP 3-28
O .OPTION BADCHR 3-29, 3-30
OCT keyword 2-8, 2-32, 2-173 .OPTION BIASFILE 3-31
OFF option 3-130 .OPTION BIAWARN 3-32
.OP command 2-124 .OPTION BINPRINT 3-33
op-amps model, names 2-115 .OPTION BKPSIZ 3-34

IN-9
.OPTION BRIEF 2-125, 3-2, 3-35, 3-104, .OPTION FAST 3-74
3-121, 3-129, 3-132 .OPTION FFTOUT 3-75
.OPTION BYPASS 3-36 .OPTION FS 3-76
.OPTION BYTOL 3-37 .OPTION FT 3-77
.OPTION CAPTAB 3-38 .OPTION GENK 3-78
.OPTION CDS 3-39 .OPTION GMAX 3-79
.OPTION CHGTOL 3-40 .OPTION GMIN 3-80
.OPTION CO 2-172, 2-177, 3-41 .OPTION GMINDC 3-81
for printout width 3-41 .OPTION GRAMP 3-82
.OPTION CONVERGE 3-42 .OPTION GSHUNT 3-83
.OPTION CPTIME 3-43 .OPTION H9007 3-84
.OPTION CSDF 3-44 .OPTION HIER_SCALE 3-85
.OPTION CSHDC 3-45 .OPTION ICSWEEP 3-86
.OPTION CSHUNT 3-46 .OPTION IMAX 3-87
.OPTION CVTOL 3-47 .OPTION IMIN 3-88
.OPTION D_IBIS 3-48 .OPTION INGOLD 3-89
.OPTION DCAP 3-49 .OPTION INTERP 3-90
.OPTION DCCAP 3-50 .OPTION ITL1 3-91
.OPTION DCFOR 3-51 .OPTION ITL2 3-92
.OPTION DCHOLD 3-52 .OPTION ITL3 3-93
.OPTION DCON 3-53 .OPTION ITL4 3-94
.OPTION DCSTEP 3-54 .OPTION ITL5 3-95
.OPTION DCTRAN 3-55 .OPTION ITLPTRAN 3-96
.OPTION DEFAD 3-56 .OPTION ITLPZ 3-97
.OPTION DEFAS 3-57 .OPTION ITRPRT 3-98
.OPTION DEFL 3-58 .OPTION KCLTEST 3-99
.OPTION DEFNRD 3-59 .OPTION KLIM 3-100
.OPTION DEFNRS 3-60 .OPTION LENNAM 3-101
.OPTION DEFPD 3-61 .OPTION LIMPTS 3-102
.OPTION DEFPS 3-62 .OPTION LIMTIM 3-103
.OPTION DEFW 3-63 .OPTION LIST 3-104
.OPTION DELMAX 3-64 .OPTION LVLTIM 3-105
.OPTION DI 3-65 .OPTION MAXAMP 3-106
.OPTION DIAGNOSTIC 3-66 .OPTION MAXORD 3-107
.OPTION DLENCSDF 3-67 .OPTION MBYPASS 3-108
.OPTION DV 3-68 .OPTION MEASDGT 3-109
.OPTION DVDT 3-69 .OPTION MEASFAIL 3-110
.OPTION DVTR 3-70 .OPTION MEASOUT 3-112
.OPTION EPSMIN 3-71 .OPTION MEASSORT 3-111
.OPTION EXPLI 3-72 .OPTION MENTOR 3-113
.OPTION EXPMAX 3-73

IN-10
.OPTION METHOD 3-114 .OPTION RMAX 3-157
.OPTION MODMONTE 3-116 .OPTION RMIN 3-158
.OPTION MODSRH 3-117 .OPTION SCALE 3-159
.OPTION MONTECON 3-118 .OPTION SCALM 3-160
.OPTION MU 3-119 .OPTION SDA 3-161
.OPTION NEWTOL 3-120 .OPTION SEARCH 3-162
.OPTION NODE 3-121 .OPTION SEED 3-163
.OPTION NOELCK 3-122 .OPTION SLOPETOL 3-164
.OPTION NOMOD 3-123 .OPTION SPARSE 3-165
.OPTION NOPAGE 3-124 .OPTION SPICE 3-166
.OPTION NOPIV 3-125 .OPTION STATFL 3-168
.OPTION NOTOP 3-126 .OPTION TIMERES 3-169
.OPTION NOWARN 3-127 .OPTION TNOM 3-170
.OPTION NUMDGT 3-128 .OPTION TRCON 3-171
.OPTION NXX 3-129 .OPTION TRTOL 3-173
.OPTION OFF 3-130 .OPTION UNWRAP 3-174
.OPTION OPTLST 3-131 .OPTION VERIFY 3-175
.OPTION OPTS 3-132 .OPTION VFLOOR 3-176
.OPTION PARHIER 3-133 .OPTION VNTOL 3-177
.OPTION PATHNUM 3-134 .OPTION WARNLIMIT 3-178
.OPTION PIVOT 3-135 .OPTION WL 3-179
.OPTION PIVREF 3-137 .OPTION XDTEMP 3-180
.OPTION PIVREL 3-138 .OPTION ZUKEN 3-182
.OPTION PIVTOL 3-139 OPTLST option 3-131
.OPTION PLIM 3-140 OPTS option 3-132
.OPTION POST 3-141 Opus 3-39, 3-161
.OPTION POST_VERSION 3-142 oscillation, eliminating 3-114
.OPTION PROBE 3-143 outer sweep 2-21
.OPTION PSF 3-144 Output 1-4
.OPTION PURETP 3-145 output
.OPTION PUTMEAS 3-146 data
.OPTION RELH 3-147 format 3-109, 3-144
limiting 3-90
.OPTION RELI 3-148
significant digits specification 3-128
.OPTION RELMOS 3-149
specifying 3-102
.OPTION RELQ 3-150 storing 3-112
.OPTION RELTOL 3-151 files
.OPTION RELV 3-152 reducing size of 3-178
.OPTION RELVAR 3-153 .MEASURE results 2-91
.OPTION RELVDC 3-154 plotting 2-134
.OPTION RESMIN 3-155 printing 2-136–2-140

IN-11
 printout format 3-89 PIVOT option 3-135
variables PIVREF option 3-137
printing 3-98 PIVREL option 3-138
probing 2-141 PIVTOL option 3-136, 3-139
specifying significant digits for 3-128
.PKG command 2-132
ovari 2-158, 2-160
PLIM option 3-140
plot
P models 2-115
value calculation method 3-23
.PARAM command 2-127
.PLOT command 2-134
parameters
in .ALTER block 2-12
AC sweep 2-5
DC sweep 2-28 PLOT keyword 2-114
defaults 3-133 pnp BJT models 2-115
FROM 2-113 POI keyword 2-8, 2-32, 2-173
IC 2-34, 2-68 pole/zero analysis, maximum iterations 3-97
inheritance 3-133 polygon, defining 2-155
ITROPT optimization 2-118 POST_VERSION option 3-142
LEVEL 2-118 power operating point table 2-125
matrix 2-120 PP 2-105, 2-108
names 2-116
PP keyword 2-106, 2-107
simulator access 2-78
.PRINT command 2-136
skew, assigning 2-77
in .ALTER 2-12
UIC 2-35, 2-69
See also model parameters, optimization printing
parameters bisection data 3-131
PARHIER option 3-133 Broyden update data 3-131
Jacobian data 3-131
PARMIN optimization parameter 2-118
printout
path names 3-134
disabling 3-35, 3-129
path numbers, printing 3-134 suppressing 2-142
PATHNUM option 3-134 value calculation method 3-23
p-channel .PROBE command 2-141
JFETs models 2-115
PROBE option 3-143
MOSFET’s models 2-115
propogation delays
Peak 2-96
measuring 2-93
peak measurement 2-96 with .MEASURE 2-92
peak-to-peak value 2-108 .PROTECT command 2-142
measuring 2-105 protecting data 2-142
pivot
PSF option 3-144
algorithm, selecting 3-135
PURETP option 3-145
change message 3-136
reference 3-137 PUTMEAS option 3-146
.PZ command 2-143

IN-12
R SCALM option 3-160
Schmitt trigger example 2-30
reference temperature 2-166
SDA option 3-161
RELH option 3-147
SEARCH option 3-162
RELI option 3-99, 3-148
SEED option 3-163
RELIN optimization parameter 2-119
.SENS command 2-148
RELMOS option 3-16, 3-99, 3-149
Setup 1-4
RELOUT optimization parameter 2-119
.SHAPE command 2-150
RELQ option 3-150
Defining Circles 2-152
RELTOL option 3-40, 3-151
Defining Polygons 2-153
RELTOLoption 3-151 Defining Rectangles 2-151
RELV option 3-74, 3-108, 3-152 Defining Strip Polygons 2-155
RELVAR option 3-153 SIM2 distortion measure 2-42
RELVDC option 3-152, 3-154 simulation
resistance 3-155 accuracy 3-22, 3-105
RESMIN option 3-155 improvement 3-69
RESULTS keyword 2-32 multiple analyses, .ALTER statement 2-12
RIN keyword 2-121 multiple runs 2-51
Rise 2-92 reducing time 2-25, 3-28, 3-36, 3-69, 3-88,
3-93, 3-164, 3-173
rise and fall times 2-93
results
RISE keyword 2-100 plotting 2-134
RISETIME option 3-156 printing 2-136
RMAX option 3-157 specifying 2-91
RMIN option 3-158 title 2-169
RMS Simulation Runs 1-5
measurement 2-96 skew, parameters 2-77
used with .MEASURE 2-96 SLOPETOL option 3-164
RMS keyword 2-107 small-signal, DC sensitivity 2-148
ROUT keyword 2-121 source
row/matrix ratio 3-138 AC sweep 2-5
DC sweep 2-28
SPARSE option 3-165
S SPICE
S parameter, model type 2-115 compatibility 3-167
.SAMPLE 2-145 AC output 3-23
.SAMPLE statement 2-145 plot 3-140
sampling noise 2-145 SPICE option 3-166
.SAVE command 2-146 START keyword 2-173
SCALE option 3-159

IN-13
statements .NOISE 2-123
.AC 2-5 .OP 2-124
.ALIAS 2-9 .OPTION SEARCH 3-162
.ALTER 2-12, 2-39 .PARAM 2-127
alter block 1-1 .PKG 2-132
.BIASCHK 2-14 .PLOT 2-134
.CONNECT 2-17 .PRINT 2-136
.DATA 2-19 .PROBE 2-141
external file 2-19 .PROTECT 2-142
inline 2-19 .PZ 2-143
.DC 2-28, 2-31 .SAMPLE 2-145
.DCVOLT 2-34, 2-68 .SAVE 2-146
.DEL LIB 2-36 .SENS 2-148
.DISTO 2-40, 2-41 .SHAPE 2-150
.DOUT 2-43 .STIM 2-156
.EBD 2-45 .SUBCKT 2-162
.ELSE 2-47 .TEMP 2-165, 2-166
.ELSEIF 2-48 .TF 2-167
.END 2-50 .TITLE 2-169
.ENDDATA 2-52 .TRAN 2-170
.ENDIF 2-53 .UNPROTECT 2-175
.ENDL 2-54, 2-77, 2-78 .VEC 2-176
.ENDS 2-55, 2-56 .WIDTH 2-177
.EOM 2-56 STATFL option 3-168
.FFT 2-57 statistics, listing 3-21
.FOUR 2-60 .STIM command 2-156
.FSOPTIONS 2-62
subcircuit commands 1-5
.GLOBAL 2-64
subcircuits
.GRAPH 2-65
calling 2-84, 2-163
.IBIS 2-67
global versus local nodes 2-64
.IC 2-34, 2-68
names 2-85, 2-164
.IF 2-70
node numbers 2-85, 2-164
.INCLUDE 2-51, 2-72, 2-147
parameter 2-55, 2-56, 2-84, 2-85, 2-86,
.LAYERSTACK 2-73
2-163, 2-164
.LIB 2-75, 2-77
printing path numbers 3-134
nesting 2-78
test example 2-84, 2-162
.LOAD 2-81
.SUBCKT command 2-162
.MACRO 2-84
.MALIAS 2-87 sweep
.MATERIAL 2-89 data 2-21, 3-112
.MEASURE 2-91, 3-109, 3-112 frequency 2-6
inner 2-21
.MODEL 2-114
.NET 2-120 outer 2-21
.NODESET 2-122, 3-51 SWEEP keyword 2-8, 2-32, 2-173

IN-14
T TRCON option 3-171
TRIG keyword 2-93
target specification 2-93, 2-94
trigger specification 2-93, 2-94
TEMP
keyword 2-8, 2-32 TRTOL option 3-173
model parameter 2-166 TSTEP
.TEMP command 2-165 multiplier 3-157, 3-158
option 3-157, 3-158
temperature
AC sweep 2-5
DC sweep 2-28, 2-29
derating 2-166
U
reference 2-166 U Element, transmission line model 2-115
.TF command 2-167 UIC
keyword 2-173
time 2-125
parameter 2-35, 2-69
See also CPU time
.UNPROTECT command 2-175
TIMERES option 3-169
timestep UNWRAP option 3-174
algorithms 3-69
calculation for DVDT=3 3-76
changing size 3-150
V
control 3-76, 3-153, 3-173 .VEC command 2-176
internal 3-64 VERIFY option 3-175
maximum 3-87, 3-94, 3-157 version
minimum 3-88, 3-93, 3-158 H9007 compatibility 3-84
reversal 3-19 HSPICE 2-116
setting initial 3-64 Version Options 3-174
transient analysis algorithm 3-105 VFLOOR option 3-176
variation by HSPICE 3-64 Viewlogic graph data file 3-67
.TITLE command 2-169 VNTOL option 3-37, 3-74, 3-177
title for simulation 2-169 voltage
TNOM option 2-166, 3-170 error tolerance
TO keyword 2-106, 2-113 DC analysis 3-152, 3-154
TOL keyword 2-145 transient analysis 3-151
TOP keyword 2-147 initial conditions 2-34, 2-68
iteration-to-iteration change 3-68
.TRAN command 2-170
maximum change 3-19
transient analysis
minimum
Fourier analysis 2-60
DC analysis 3-20
initial conditions 2-34, 2-68
listing 3-176
number of iterations 3-95
transient analysis 3-18
TRAP algorithm operating point table 2-125
See trapezoidal integration
relative change, setting 3-153
trapezoidal integration tolerance
algorithm 3-105 BYTOL option 3-37
coefficient 3-119 MBYPASS multiplier 3-108
IN-15
 value for BYPASS 3-37 WL option 3-179
VOLTAGE keyword 2-125 WSF output data 3-39, 3-161

W X
W Element transmission line model 2-115 XDTEMP option 3-180
warnings
limiting repetitions 3-178
misuse of VERSION parameter 2-116 Y
suppressing 3-127 YMAX parameter 2-113
WARNLIMIT option 3-178 YMIN parameter 2-113
WEIGHT keyword 2-107, 2-113
WHEN keyword 2-99
WHEN, using with .MEASURE 2-98
Z
.WIDTH command 2-177 ZUKEN option 3-182

IN-16